Home
        Solution 862 Installation Manual
         Contents
1.                                                                                                         Dialler Information 129  Dialler Information 130  Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 131  Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 131  Handshake Tone For Receiver 1 132  Transmission Format For Receiver 1 133  Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1 133  Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 134  Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 134  Handshake Tone For Receiver 2 135  Transmission Format For Receiver 2 136  Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2 136  Dialling Format 137  Reserved 137  Telco Arming Sequence 138  Telco Arming     Call Forward Immediate On 138  Telco Arming     Call Forward No Answer On 138  Telco Disarming Sequence 139  Telco Arming     Call Forward Immediate Off 139  Telco Arming     Call Forward No Answer Off 139   Call Back Telephone Number 139  Ring Count 140  Answering Machine Bypass 140  Telephone Line Fault Options 141  Display FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails 141  Sound Alarm When System Is Armed 141  Sound Alarm When System Is Disarmed 141  Reserved 141  Ring Burst Time 142  Dialler Options 143  Programming Option Bits 144  Dialler Options 1 145  Dialler Reporting Functions Allowed 145  Disabled   Disable All Dialler Reporting Functions 145  Remote Arming Via The Telephone Allowed 145  Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed 145   Use Bell 103 For FSK Format  Disabled   CCITT V21  145  Dialler Options 2 146  Open Close Reports On
2.                                    220  Alarm Reporting    167  Answering Machine                                             140  231  Only When Armed                       esse 145  Armed H       E 231  Arming  In AWAY Mode                mI 52  107  In STAY Mode 1                     eee 54  107  In STAY Mode2 eee 57  107  Single Button Operation                       esee 220  Via Telephone    eee 112  145  ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Audible                                                  46  50  Auto        In STAY Mode 1                               219  Auto Arming Pre Alert Timer                       sese 208  Auto Arming TIME  rresia 208  Auto Disarming Time 0 0 0    ee ee ceseeesecssecreeeneeeeeeees 209  Automatic Stepping Of                                                 38  AW AY Indicator                eeeeeeeceeeeeeeee 44  47  AWAY Mode  ed nnne eie erts 231  ATINS iecit e nee ends 52  107  Disarming   inedite si on eniin ees 53  AWAY Obs enini one pe teens 231  B  Basic  Pagers zen e Reged eterne 127  Basic Pager Reporting                   seseeeeee 127  Battery Testing 0 0 0    ee eonna 231  Bell Test    eene eee bis Aas 108  Bypass Reports    176  C  Call Back Telephone                                                   139  Cellular Diallers               es 226  Changing User Codes                        eee 100  Code Retries          iter ei ted 185  Codepad       5     2 tete reine tel 231  BUZZ60 enm dede RE 190  Buzzer Tone Cha
3.                       53  Disarming From STAY Mode 1                                 56  Disarming From STAY Mode 2                                 58  System Options Tusinin e r S 215  EDM Smart Lockout                       eeeeeeeeee 215  Monitoring Of Horn Speaker                                    215  System Options 2    216  Access Denied To Be 51                                           216  Codepad Fire To Be  1                                               216  Codepad Medical To Be Silent                                 216  Codepad Panic To Be                                                216  System Options 3                                            217  AC Fail In 1 Hour                   eee 217  Handover Delay To Be Sequential                           217  Ignore AC Mains Fail Indication                              217  Zone Pulse Count Handover                                    217  System Options 4                sse 218  Arm Disarm Tracking On Power Up                        218  Enable Control Panel To Power Up Disarmed         218  Enable Radio Key Keyswitch Interface or Night Arm  Station    eie epu rerit eee tese 218  Internal Crystal To Keep Time                                 218  System Status  AC Mains Fail Report    183  AC Mains Fail Restore                                              183  Access                                          185  Fuse  Fail Report  eR Ren Ue 182  Fuse Fail Restore Report                        sese 182  Low Ba
4.                     seen 232  F  Fault  AC Mains Failure               66           amp  Ais tie E ptu RE ERR 221  Communication Failure                    esee 65  Date and Time    ipee beet 64  E2 Fault     eie berba 64  Fuse  Fail  ies eei 65  Horn Speaker    64  Low  Batt  ty 2 eee eee 64  Sensor Wa  ltch       deer bete teintes 64  Telephone Line Fault                          sees 64  Fault Analysis Mode                        see 63  ISSUE130    258    Determine Types    discs ener 109  Ext iiem 109  FAULT Indicator                   eeeeeeeeeeeenrnn 45  49  Features  Solution 404   iiie eh teneret erp eeu 17  Pire Alarme e                   59  Forced Arming                        sess 52  55  57  171  232                                   M   M   65  G  Glossary Of Terms                  esee 231  H  Hand Held Dialler                                                          226  Hand Held Programmer                             sess 25  225  Hand Held Radio Remote Control                               232  Hand Held Transmitters                        esee 224  Handover eec rr                 162  Delay  nero ea Ret 232  Delay To Be                                                               217  Handshake  Extend Time To                                         146  Handshake Tone For Receiver 1                                  132  Handshake Tone For Receiver 2                                  135  Hold Down Function  Arm In AWAY Mode                    eee 107  Ar
5.                  eese 124  Dialling Format                    seen 137  Disable Factory Default                             sees 41  Disatmed oc       ies ee eee      231  Disarming  Automatic enter petes 209  From AWAY Mode                  see 53  From STAY Mode 1                       eee 56  From STAY Mode 2                 sse 58  Single Button Operation                      sese 220  Domestic Dialling  Acknowledging Alarm                                              120  Changing Domestic Telephone Numbers             78 94  Command 965                                           37  Disable79  81  82  83  84  86  95  97  98  99  100  102   122               Oo etm itus 120  Function  ete 120  Setting Up  amp  Programming                      sees 121  DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Sec                         147  Dual Reporting       rene eee etie 231  Duress  Alarmas cie eR DI AURA 59  E  E2 Fault eR PERI Be eh ti 64  EDM Smart Watch                   sesseeeee 215  EDMSAT vs canis ail ee ees 86  192  225  231  Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode               54  57  205  Entry me   vets ie et eee a Reds 231  Entry Timer 1    ni ei a teeth 204  Entry Timer  onec    i e E 204  Entry Warning    eoe detecte eibi 231  EOL Resistor Value    158  Erase Programming Key                       sees 36  Event Memory Recall                                           88  106  Exit Installer s Programming Mode                                33  Exit Timer 205  232  External Equipment  
6.                  sees 197  Radio Control Output 2   Not In AWAY Mode      197  Remote Control 1                        esee 197  Remote Control 2                      eese 197  Remote Control 3                       eene 197  Ring Detector 197    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    259  Sensor Watch Alarm                    seeeee 194  Silent Alarm     2  entrent n 195  Sirens                             195  Strobe Operating ss         enemies 195  System Armed     2                  pin 192                1                4                                 192  Telephone Line Fail                           eee 194  Zone Not Sealed                      sse 198  Zone Not Sealed After Exit                                     198  Output Polarity  Normally Low  Going                                             200  Normally Low  Latching                                         200  Normally Low  One Shot                                        200  Normally Low  One Shot Open With Alarm            200  Normally Low  One Shot Open With Reset             200  Normally Low  One Shot Open With Retrigger       200  Normally Low  Pulsing                                           200  Normally Open  Going                                            199  Normally Open  Latching Low                                200  Normally Open  One Shot Low                                199  Normally Open  One Shot Low With Alarm            200  Normally Open  One Shot Low With Reset 
7.              47  CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad                                   44  Command 958   Enable Disable Zone Status                 30  Command 959   Test Programming Key                        31    Command 960   Exit Installer s Programming Mode    33  Command 961   Reset Control Panel Back To Factory                  eene PEURIROSORER 33  Command 962   Copy Control Panel Memory To  Programming Key          eene bees emere 34    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Index  Command 963   Copy From Programming Key To    Control Panel           neg etes 35  Command 964   Erase Programming Key                      36  Command 965   Set Up Domestic Dialling                    37    Command 966   Enable Disable Automatic Stepping   38  Command 999   Display Panel Type Software Version40    Communication Failure                       sese 65  Component Overlay                   esee 235  Connections Of Split EOL Using N O Contacts           160  Consumer Options 1                       eene 219  220  Auto        In STAY Mode 1                        sess 219  Enable STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status  Suh ah Sage hone beet 219  Send Test Report After Siren Reset                          219  Send Test Reports Only If Armed                             219  Consumer Options 2  Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm                             220  Enable Codepad Extinguish Mode                            220  Single Button Arming                    eee 220  Single
8.             199  Normally Open  One Shot Low With Retrigger       199  Normally Open  Pulsing                                          199  Output Not                           199  Outp  ts        te egets 190  One Shot Polarities                      seseeeeee 202  Polarity ouo eee ease 199  Pulsing Polarities                      see 201  Redirecting Output To Codepad Buzzer                  191  Timing   5 cte                                    201  Turmng On OffF      s oC R OG Ree ober 102  P  P    nici s EE eO mme ete 232  Panic           eie eee 59  Phone Controller                           esee 225  232  Plug          neces ited ei ee ee 226  Point ID  Codes  1 2 teer eee 125  Power Up Disarmed                       sese 218  Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1                 131  Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2                134  Ptosr  mming        ie ete eee eere dir 22  Automatic Stepping Of Locations                              38  Codepad Indicators                          eese 23  Entry Exit Tiemrs                          204  Installer s Programming Commands                          29  Option Bits oo                                  28  144 214  Via Hand Held                                                           25  Via Programming Key                     eee 27  Via Remote Codepad                         sees 23  Programming Key                    sese 27  225  Copy From Programming Key To Panel                    35  Copy Panel Memory
9.             Sv    4            Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    84    ISSUE130    a    a    Solution 862 Installation Manual    How To Program The Telco Disarming Sequence     Easy Call Forward  Immediate Off     1     Enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by           the AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     Press button 2 followed by the  Away  button to change the telco disarming sequence   Three beeps will be heard     If a previous telco disarming sequence has already been programmed  the sequence will  be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators  Refer to    Table 29   Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence    on page 80 for the  indicators and their meanings    If no telco disarming sequence has been programmed  a further two beeps will be heard    after entering this mode  These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the  call forward sequence has been displayed     Enter  stay  2 1  stay 2 and the LAWAY  button     Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state     semen      2  ms    sw 2 1 E2             How To Disable The Telco Disarming Sequence    If at any time you wish to cancel the telco disarming sequence  you may enter your     INSTALLER CODE  followed by 3 and the button  followed by 2 and the  AWAY  YJ button   then the button followed by the 4 and the button            du    Electronics 
10.            68  Add or Changing Transmitter Codes                    69  02  Arming In AWAY                                              71  72  Arming In STAY Mode 1                                    71  72  Deleting Transmitter Codes                              sss 70  Disarming From STAY Mode 1                          71  72  Disarming In AWAY Mode                                 71  72  Horn Speaker Beeps                                          68  Operating Outputs                                                   73  Panic Alarm       ccccccccccccccccccccceceseseseseseseseseseeseeeees 71  72  Strobe Indications                       eee 68  Remote Radio User Codes  Adding Or Changing                     sese 69  92           teh Se Ae eC 70  93  Reporting Format  4   2 Reporting Format    eee sese 126  Basic Pater                        Ra PERPE rites 127  Contact ID Format                                     124  Domestic Dialling                         eeeeene 120  Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default               33  Ring Burst                                         e      142  Ring Counts asse ees aes lke 140  S  Satellite  Siena een ees 225  231  Satellite Siren Service Mode                         sss 86  Sealed  isicing m e Rr 232  Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1             131  Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2             134  Sensor Watch         cccccccceccssssscececeeceesensseeeeees 64  168  232  Reports  nte pine e oD rep 178
11.           ELECTRONICS Solution 862    DESIGN  amp           MANUFACTURING Installation Manual  ee    ly Bush                    Me     Bw e                           ELECTRONICS    DESIGN  amp      MANUFACTURING      MA406l    Solution  This page has been included for you to cut out and insert into the spine    of the folder   862      Installation      Manual    ISSUE 1 30    fen    QU                61 2  9672 1233      Solution 862    Installation Manual    Copyright    2001 by Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited   SYDNEY  AUSTRALIA    Document Part Number MA4061  DOCUMENT ISSUE 1 30  Printed 10 May 2001    This documentation is provided to suit Solut ion 862 Control Panel  CC406   Firmware Revision 1 00     1 09  Hardware Revision A   J  Alarm Link required   2 74 or higher  Control Panel Software Version 1 00     1 09 2 S406_V10    Copyright Notice    All rights reserved  No part of this publication may be reproduced  transmitted or stored in a retrieval system in any form or  by any means  electronic  mechanical  photocopying  recording  or otherwise  without the prior written permission of  Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited     Trademarks    Throughout this document trademark names may have been used  Rather than put a trademark symbol in every occurrence  of a trademark name  we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark  owner with no intention of infringement of the trademark     Not
12.          f Option 2 and 4 will not operate unless option 1 has been enabled     Display FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails      The FAULT indicator will flash and the codepad buzzer will beep once every minute if the  control panel detects that the telephone line has been disconnected  Refer to Fault Descriptions  on page 64 for more information     Sound Alarm When System Is Armed    2 Option 1 in this location will also need to be selected for this option to operate  If the control  panel detects that the telephone line has been disconnected when the system is armed in  AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2  the horn speaker  bell and strobe outputs will  operate     Sound Alarm When System Is Disarmed    4 Option 1 in this location will also need to be selected for this option to operate  If the control  panel detects that the telephone line has been disconnected when the system is disarmed  the  horn speaker  bell and strobe outputs will operate     Reserved  8  aa If Options 1  2 and 4 have been added together  the horn speaker  bell  strobe and    EDMSAT outputs will operate when the system is armed or disarmed     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    142 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Ring Burst Time    LOCATION 748   749 46    Location Description    Increments Of 5 ms       Increments Of 80 ms    Table 62  Ring Burst Time Locations     V1 07   These locations program the ring burst time  Default   500 ms   If the duration of  the t
13.        Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Dialler Information 131    LOCATION 000   015 0000000000000000    When the control panel needs to transmit a report  the control panel will dial this number in an  attempt to contact the monitoring station or pager etc  If the call is successful  the relevant  information will be transmitted and the dialler will return back to the stand by mode     If unsuccessful  the dialler will attempt two more times using the primary telephone number for  receiver 1  after which the secondary telephone number for receiver 1 will be called three  times  If the dialling sequence is still unsuccessful  the control panel will then attempt to  repeat this procedure dialling the primary telephone number and the secondary telephone  number for receiver 2 if programmed     This procedure will be repeated only once again  i e  Maximum of 12 call attempts per alarm   after ten minutes if none of the first 6 attempts were successful if only the primary telephone  number and secondary telephone number for receiver 1 has been programmed     If the primary telephone number and secondary telephone numbers for both receiver 1 and  receiver 2 have been programmed  a maximum of 24 call attempts per alarm will be made     Contact your monitoring station or pager company for the relevant telephone numbers before  programming these locations     When Receiver 1 has been set up for domestic reporting  telephone numbers   EF programmed into these locat
14.        WASTER CODE   1   ow     USER NUMBER     AWAY     TRANSMIT            When adding or changing remote radio user codes  this function will automatically    terminate if a button is not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the button   One long beep indicates the code entered already exists or an incorrect user number has  been selected     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions 93    How To Delete A Remote Radio User Code    1  Enter your  MASTER cope  followed by 1 and the AWAY button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     2  Enter the  USER NuMBER   9 16  that you wish to delete followed by the  AWAY  button     Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate  Refer  to  Table 36  Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers  on page 93     3  Press the button to delete the user code   Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish     If you wish to delete any further remote radio user codes  repeat this procedure as many  times as required        gt                          aww     USER NUMBER    AWAY    STAY                     When deleting remote radio user codes  this function will automatically terminate if a    button is not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the button  One long    beep indicates the an incorrect user number has been selected     User Zone   Zone2  Zone3  Zone4  Zone5 JZone6  Zone7  Zone
15.      FAULT Indicator    The FAULT indicator is used to display that the system has detected a system fault  Refer to  Fault Analysis Mode on page 63 for more information on system faults     Every time a new system fault has been detected  e g   FAULT indicator flashing   the codepad  will begin to beep once every minute     Pressing the button once will cancel the once a minute beep and acknowledge the fault   e g   FAULT indicator on      Indicator Definition       0   There Is A System Fault That Needs To Be Rectified    Off The System Is Normal  There Are No Faults  Flashing There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged    Table 12  FAULT Indicator       Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    46 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Audible Indicators    In general  the audible indications given out by the codepad are as follows   Indicator Definition  A Button Has Been Pressed On The Codepad Or End  One Short Beep Of Exit Time When Armed In Either STAY Mode 1 Or  STAY Mode 2  Two Short Beeps The System Has Accepted Your Code  Three Short Beeps The Requested Function Has Been Executed    One L B Indicates The End Of Exit Time In AWAY Mode Or  MEER The Requested Operation Has Been Denied Or Aborted  Walk Test Mode Is Currently Active Or Warning  One Short Beep Every Second Before Automatic Arming Takes Place  One shore Beep Every Two Telephone Monitor Mode Is Active  Seconds  One Short Beep Every Minute   There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Ackno
16.     136    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Transmission Format For Receiver 2    LOCATION 073    l    Enter the desired transmission format here  This location selects the data format that will be  transmitted to the base station receiver  This location also allows you to configure the control  panel for domestic or basic pager formats     Transmission Format Option Transmission Format       Table 57  Transmission Formats For Receiver 2    Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2     LOCATION 074     079    Example    ISSUE130    000000    This number is transmitted to identify the calling control panel  Enter the desired Subscriber  ID Number in the six locations provided  For Basic Pager Format     LOCATION 074     076     will be ignored and the first digit of the Subscriber ID Number required must start in     LOCATION 077   When using Domestic Dialling Format  the number of identification  beeps will be the number that is programmed in    LOCATION 079     This gives the ability to  identify between 15 different control panels calling the same telephone number     If you wish to program the Subscriber ID Number as 4729  you would program the six  locations as follows     004729    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Dialler Information 137    Dialling Format    LOCATION 080 1    The method for dialling telephone numbers is entered here  Options 3 and 6 will alternate the  dialling sequence between DTMF and Decadic if the call to the base station receiver wa
17.     Table 94  System Status     AC Fail Restore Report Locations    A restore signal will be transmitted when the AC mains supply has been restored continuously  for more than two minutes     If an  AC Loss  restore report is not required  program  LOCATION 350   351  with a  zero     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    184 Solution 862 Installation Manual    System Status   Low Battery Report    LOCATION 352   353 1    Location Description    System Status     Low Battery Reporting Code  Tens Digit        System Status     Low Battery Reporting Code  Units Digit     Table 95  System Status     Low Battery Report Locations    A  Battery Test Failure  report  Contact ID Event Code 309  will be transmitted to the base  station receiver when the systems battery voltage falls below 10 5 volts or when a dynamic  battery test detects a low capacity battery     The control panel continually monitors the battery voltage  Refer to Fault Descriptions on    page 64 for more information  A dynamic battery test is performed every time the system has  been armed as well as every four hours from power up of the control panel          If a  Low Battery  report is not required  program  LOCATION 352   353  with a zero   F      Outputs 1     4 will NOT operate whilst the control panel detects a low battery     System Status   Low Battery Restore Report    LOCATION 354   355 6    Location Description    System Status     Low Battery Restore Report  Tens Digit        Sys
18.     There are two methods for arming your system in STAY Mode 1  Method one is standard and  will always operate  Method two is optional and needs Option 2 in  LOCATION 429  to be  enabled on page 220     Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode    When arming the system in STAY Mode 1  an optional entry timer called Entry Guard Timer  For STAY Mode may be used to delay the sirens  strobe and bell outputs if a zone that has not  been automatically isolated has triggered into alarm condition  Entry Guard Timer For STAY  Mode is the delay time used for all zones except 24 hour zones when the system is armed in  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2     If the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode has been programmed and a zone that has not been  automatically isolated has triggered  the codepad will beep twice a second until the Entry  Guard Timer For STAY Mode has expired or the system has been disarmed  If the alarm  condition has not been reset before Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode expires  the strobe   bell and siren outputs will activate into alarm     Single button arming in STAY Mode 1 will report as user code number 16     How To Arm The System In STAY Mode 7  1  Enter your followed by the  stay  button     Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will illuminate  Exit time will now  commence     Any zones that have been programmed to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1    will begin to flash until exit time expires  At the end of exit time  the ZONE indicators  will extinguish and t
19.     User Code Priority    Priority Description Priority Description    eport  Arm Only NE Arm Disarm   Master Code Functions      Arm Disarm   Master Code Functions    ccm Se Open Close Report  Arm Di   Master Code Functi   Code     J Arm Disarm   Master Code Functions   Code To  Lee  isis        Isolate   Open Close Report    Table 133  User Code Priority Levels       Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    248 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Location 265 Page 156  Day Alarm Zones 1   Zone 1 4   Zone 3  2   Zone 2 8   Zone 4   t c x   c CMM M MM MEME EC I       Page 158  i 0   No End Of Line Resistor 9   10K  EOL Resistor Value a EM  2 1K5 11   22K  3   2K2 12   Reserved  4          13   Reserved  5       9 14   Reserved  6   4K7 15   Split EOL  3K3 6K8      Six Burglary  7   5K6 Zones and Two 24 Hour Zones 15  8   6K8     Location 267 3220       6 Page 161  Zones  Lone  Location 267   273 Lone2 Location 274   280  21010             Zone 3 Location 281   287 Zone 4 Location 288   294 Zone 5 Location 295     301  Leon                     Zone 6 Location 302   308 Zone 7 Location 309   315 Zone 8 Location 316   322                         eel ej   Zone Zone Pulse Zone Pulse Zone Zone Report Dialler  Type Count Count Time Option 1 Option 2 Code Options  Zone Types    There are fifteen different zone types to choose from  Each zone contains eight locations  Zones 1 to 6 are fully  programmable whereas zones 7 and 8 may only be programmed to any 24 hour z
20.     button  Refer to Alarm Link Software on page 114 for more information     Terminate Alarm Link Connection On Alarm    4 If the control panel is communicating with a remote computer via Alarm Link Software   CC816  and an alarm has registered  the Alarm Link session will be terminated and the  relevant alarm message will then be transmitted to the base station receiver     If an alarm occurs that does not need to report to the base station receiver  the session will not  be terminated  If this option has not been selected and an alarm has registered  the Alarm Link  software will prompt the operator with a    Terminate    or    Continue    message     Use External Modem Module  CC811  For Alarm Link Operations    8 If this option has been selected  the control panel will use the external plug in Module  CC811   for remote programming operations via the Alarm Link Software  CC816   This option should  only be enabled where the telephone line is susceptible to noise     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    118 Solution 862 Installation Manual    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Domestic Dialling       This section includes the following       Domestic Dialling Format     Domestic Dialling Function      Acknowledge Domestic Dialling       Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting      Disable Domestic Dialling    120    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Domestic Dialling Format    ISSUE130    The locations of the prima
21.    12V 09               ZONE EOL  INPUT FOL 6K8  3K3  ZONE 9  4K7  N O    Figure 8  Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using One N O Contact     12V    ZONE  INPUT    ZONE       Figure 9  Connections Of Split EOL Using Two N O Contacts    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Zone Information 161    Zone Programming    Each zone contains seven locations that are divided into three groups  The first 3 locations  determine how the zone will operate  the next two locations allow various options for each  zone and the last two locations contain the dialler reporting information of each zone     Zone Operating Information    Zone Type  This location programs the  Zone Type  required  e g   Delay 1  Instant  24 Hour etc      Zone Pulse Count    This location sets how many times the zone must trigger within the time specified in the  Zone  Pulse Count Time      Zone Pulse Count Time    This parameter sets the time period for the number of times the zone must trigger before  activating an alarm     Zone Options  Zone Options 1    This location controls the zone  e g   Lockout Siren  Silent etc      Zone Options 2  This location controls the zone  e g   Isolate In STAY Mode 1  Forced Arming Allowed etc      Zone Reporting Information  Zone Report Code    If you wish the control panel to transmit zone alarm reports  this location should be  programmed as 1  If you do not wish to transmit zone alarm reports  this location should be  programmed as a 0     Zone Dial
22.    200 ms   19 8 ms     200 ms      Min 99 Min       Table 104  Pulsing Time Settings       Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    202    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    One Shot Polarities    The duration or  On  time of an output is determined by the product of the time base and the  multiplier     If an output is required to operate for five seconds  program the time settings as follows   J  ss   Time Base Multiplier    The  On  time is calculated by multiplying the time base setting  1 second  by the multiplier  value  05       i e  1 x 05   5 seconds     On Time Increments Tolerance    200 ms   19 8 Sec   s     200 ms    I Min  99 Min       Table 105  One Shot Time Settings       Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Event Timers       This section includes the following     Entry Timer 1    Entry Timer 2     Exit Time    Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode    Delay Alarm Reporting Time      Sensor Watch Time    Codepad Lockout Time     Siren Run Time      Siren Sound Rate    Auto Arming Pre Alert Timer    Auto Arming Time    Auto Disarming Time      Kiss Off Wait Time      System Time        System Date    204 Solution 862 Installation Manual    System Event Timers    This section covers the features that involve timing  Features such as entry and exit times   sensor watch time  siren run time and system date and time along with a host of other timers  are discussed extensively in this section     Programming Entry 
23.    AC Mains Failure          Remote Radio Transmitter Operations  Indications Upon Remote Radio Transmitter Operations       Remote Radio User Code Priority Levels       Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User Codes       2 Channel Radio Remote Hand Held Transmitter Operations  Arming In AWAY Mode          Disarming From AWAY Mode       Arming In STAY Mode 1       Disarming From STAY Mode 1       Panic Alarm       4 Channel Radio Remote Hand Held Transmitter Operations  Arming In AWAY Mode             Disarming From AWAY Mode  Arming In STAY Mode 1       Disarming From STAY Mode 1       Panic Alarm       Turning Output 1 ON       Turning Output 1 OFF       Turning Output 2 ON       Turning Output 2 OFF          System Functions  Installer Code Functions       Reserved       Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test Report       Changing Domestic Phone Numbers          Change Telco Arm Disarm Sequence  Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones       Satellite Siren Service Mode       Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On Off       Walk Test Mode       Event Memory Recall Mode       Reserved                                                                                                                                                       Master Code Functions 89  Reserved 89  Changing and Deleting User Codes 90  Changing and Deleting Remote Radio User Codes 92  Changing Domestic Phone Numbers 94  Change Telco Arm Disarm Sequence 96  Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones 101  Turning Outputs On Off 102  Sett
24.    All other burglary zones will automatically isolate only after the system has been  armed     Repeat Step 4 if more than one zone is required to be isolated until all zones that are  required to be isolated have been selected     Press the  Away  button when finished selecting the zones to be isolated   Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state     The zones selected to be isolated when you arm the system in AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or  STAY Mode 2 will continue to flash until the system has next been disarmed     Example          STAY     CODE    STAY       ZONE NUMBER    STAY     AWAY           As each zone is selected to be isolated  the corresponding ZONE indicator will begin  to flash  If a mistake is made  press the zone number that was incorrectly entered    followed by the  stay  button  This zone is now no longer selected to be isolated and  the ZONE indicator will extinguish     If you wish to manually isolate zones 1  3 and 4  the following sequence would be entered  below     a          STAY    CODE    STAY      me 3   Sa   4   Sa   Bo    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited          System Operations 63    Fault Analysis Mode    Whenever a system fault occurs  the FAULT or MAINS indicator will flash and the codepad will  beep once every minute     If the MAINS indicator is flashing  this is because the AC mains supply has been disconnected  from the control panel  If the AC mains supply has been disconnected continuousl
25.    BATTERY connects to the red positive terminal of the battery and the   BATTERY connects to  the black negative terminal of the battery  The battery should be a 12 volt sealed lead acid rechargeable  type with a capacity of between 1 2 AH   6 5 AH  The back up battery is protected by a 3 Amp fuse     The charging globe which is situated above the 3 Amp fuse will always be illuminated until the battery is  100  charged     This group of terminals are the connection points for your system codepads  All system codepads should  connect in a parallel configuration back to these terminals  The only factor restricting the number of  codepads that can be connected is the available power and its distribution  Each codepad has a  maximum power requirement of 60 mA with all indicators illuminated  therefore this should be taken  into consideration when calculating your available continuous power  The total continuous external load  on the system should not exceed 1 Amp maximum     This group of terminals are the output interface terminals  They can be configured to any combination of  the functions available via the system programming options  They can be used for a variety of functions  with incredible flexibility  All outputs have a common terminal that is positive 12 volts and each output  is capable of sinking a maximum of 400 mA  Output 1 is defaulted to operate a horn speaker     The outputs are protected by EDM s unique Integrated Protection System   IPS   This makes them  extr
26.    Facsimile   612 9672 1717  email  edm edm com au             
27.    LOCATION 035       If you press the button without previously entering a location number  the system will    step back one location  e g  If you are positioned at    LOCATION 035    and you press the   say  button  you will step back one location to LOCATION 034      Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    24    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    To change data in the current location  enter the new value  0     15  followed by the  stay   button  This will store the new data into the location and still leave you positioned at the same  location  You will notice that the new information programmed will be displayed on the    codepad indicators  e g  If you enter the value 1 4 followed by the  stay  button  both ZONE  4 and the MAINS indicator will illuminate      To move to the next location  press the  Away button  The data in the next locations data will  now be displayed     To exit the Installer   s Programming Mode  enter command 9 6 0 followed by the  button  Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish  The  system will now return to the disarmed state and is now ready for use     Refer to Installer   s Programming Commands on page 29 for further information on commands  that can be performed during access of Installer   s Programming Mode     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programming    25    Programming With The Hand Held Programmer       Example    The Hand Held Programmer  CC814 
28.    e  normei         Chime Only        Table 72  Zone Types       Instant Zone    0 An Instant zone  Contact ID Event Code 130  will sound the sirens and operate the dialler as  soon as it registers as unsealed after the exit timer has expired     If an Instant zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed  a zone restore report will  be automatically sent to the receiving party     Handover Zone    1 A Handover zone  Contact ID Event Code 130  will act as an instant zone if it has been  triggered by itself  If a handover zone has triggered after a delay zone  the remaining delay  time will handover from the delay zone to the handover zone  Handover may be sequential or  non sequential  The panel is default with the option of sequential handover  Refer to Option 8  in  LOCATION 426  on page 217 if you require to disable handover to be sequential     If a Handover zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed  a zone restore report  will be automatically sent to the receiving party     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Zone Information    10    163    Delay 1 Zone    A Delay 1 zone  Contact ID Event Code 130  will have a delay time determined by the value  in Entry Timer 1 on page 204  After entry time has expired  the system will activate into alarm  condition     If a Delay 1 zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed  a zone restore report will  be automatically sent to the receiving party     Delay 2 Zone    A 
29.   AWAY     NEW CODE     away           When adding or changing user codes  this function will automatically terminate if a    button is not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the  AWAY  button  One long  beep indicates the code entered already exists or an incorrect user number has been  selected     If you require to program user code number 2 as 4627  follow the steps outlined below and  remember to substitute the default Master Code  2580  with the Master Code that has been  programmed     2580  1     2    aud   4627   n    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions 91    How To Delete A User Code    1  Enter your followed by 1 and the AWAY button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     2  Enter the  USER NUMBER   1 8  that you wish to delete followed by the AWAY button     Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate  Refer  to  Table 35  Codepad Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers  on page 91     3  Press the LSTA  button to delete the user code   Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish     If you wish to delete any further user codes  repeat this procedure as many times as required           WASTER                 ara       USER NUMBER    AWAY    STAY               When deleting user codes  this function will automatically terminate if a button is not    m  f pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the        button  O
30.   Changing Telephone Numbers  on page 79 for the indicators and their meanings     If there are no telephone numbers programmed  a further two beeps will be heard after  entering this mode  These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last  phone number has been displayed     2  Enter all the digits for  PHONE No 1     one digit at a time  You will notice as each digit is  entered  the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate     3  If there is more than one telephone number  press the  stay  button followed by the 4  button after the last digit of the telephone number  This will insert a break between the  first telephone number and the second telephone number  If there is only one telephone    number  press the button to exit this mode     4  Enter all the digits for PHONE       2         digit at a time  You will notice as each digit is  entered  the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate     5  After the last digit of the second telephone number  press the button to exit this    mode unless a third telephone number is required  If there is a third telephone number    to be programmed  press the button followed by the     button to insert a break  between the second telephone number and the third telephone           INSTALLER CODE    2    AWAY      PHONE No 1     5                 PHONE No  2     away     Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program                 gt     L   2    Refer To Dit 0   3   3   mn  J  Fowe
31.   Date and Time    Horn Speaker Disconnected  Telephone Line Fault   E  Fault   Fuse Fail    Communications Failure    Table 42  Fault Indicators       Sensor Watch    1  2  7    Initiate A Modem Call    Holding the 6 button down until two beeps are heard will force the control panel to dial the  call back telephone number programmed in  LOCATION 159   174  on page 139 in an  attempt to connect to the installer s remote computer     The remote computer will be required to be running the Alarm Link Software  CC816  and  will need to be set to    Waiting For An Incoming Call   If no call back telephone number has    been programmed  holding down the 6 button will have no effect     Reset Latching Outputs    Holding the 7 button down until two beeps are heard will reset any programmable output that  has been programmed to remain on once it has been activated     The output will need to be programmed with a latching polarity  Refer to Output Polarity on  page 199 for further information     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    110 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Codepad Buzzer Tone Change    8 Holding the 8 button down continuously will change the tone of the buzzer in the remote  codepad  There are fifty different tones to choose from between 1500 Hz   5000 Hz and they  are specific to each codepad  In a multiple codepad installation  each codepad can have a   different tone     How To Change The Tone Of The Buzzer    1  To change the tone of the code
32.   Dialler                             sess 167  Sensor Wa  ltch            tenerte eoe 168  Silent Alarm    15  etre petri ey 168  Zone Options 2  Forced Arming                   sese 171  Isolate In STAY Mode 1                                         171  Zone Isolation Allowed                                sess 171  Zone Restore                                              171  Zone Reporting Information  Dialler Options                    esee 172  Zone Report Code                       essen 172  Zone Restore Coderen iiini i er 178  Zone Status  Bypass Reports scesero eoe notisen    176  Reporting Options                  ssseeeee 178  Sensor Watch Reports                    esse 178  Trouble Reports                   eene 177  Zone Types  24 Hour Burglary Zone                       eese 164  24 Hour Fire             164  24 Hour Hold Up Zone                       sees 163  24 Hour Medical                      a 163  24 Hour Panic Zone                   eese 163  24 Hour             RR 163  Chime ZONE sec eo sce tv ove insert 164  Delay 1 Zone  3  oet Rp ip Re Oen t 163  Delay 2 Zone  soon p ien petet dd 163  Handover  Zone erecto oet eet a 162  Instant Zone    ote re e Uter te ive 162  Keyswitch           nter t De 164  Zone  Not Used  oec prt ep D rS 164  ZONES          REO DTE          ENE          233  ISSUE130          Electronics Design  amp  Manufacturing Pty Limited    25 Huntingwood Drive A C N  002 907 271  Huntingwood NSW 2148  Australia Phone   612 9672 1777 
33.   MASTER CODE  followed by 1        the AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     2  Enter the  USER NUMBER   9 16  that you wish to add or change followed by the  away     button   Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate   Refer to  Table 23  Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers  on  page 70    3  Now press any of the buttons on the hand held transmitter to allow the  control panel to learn the hand held transmitters ID code  Two beeps will be heard and    the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish     If you wish to add or change any further remote radio user codes  repeat this procedure  as many times as required        1       USER NUMBER    AWAY    TRANSMIT                     When adding or changing remote radio user codes  this function will automatically    terminate if a button is not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the button   One long beep indicates the code entered already exists or an incorrect user number has  been selected     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    70    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    How To Delete A Remote Radio User Code  1  Enter your followed by l and the AWAY button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     2  Enter the  USER NuMBER   9 16  that you wish to delete followed by the button     Two beeps will be heard and the correspo
34.   Radio Control Output 2  This output will operate when the button marked AUX on the 4 channel hand held  transmitter is activated when the system is armed or disarmed     Radio Control Output 1     Not In AWAY Mode   This output will operate when the button marked DOOR on the 4 channel hand held  transmitter is activated when the system is disarmed or armed in STAY Mode 1 or  STAY Mode 2  The output will not operate when the system is armed in AWAY  Mode    Radio Control Output 2     Not In AWAY Mode   This output will operate when the button marked AUX on the 4 channel hand held  transmitter is activated when the system is disarmed or armed in STAY Mode 1 or  STAY Mode 2  The output will not operate when the system is armed in AWAY  Mode     Communications Failure After 3 Unsuccessful Calls   This output will operate when the communication dialler has made 3 unsuccessful  calls to the base station receiver  The output will reset when all messages have been  transmitted  1 e  When the buffer is empty or when all possible attempts have been  made      Communications Failure   This output will operate when the communication dialler has made all possible  attempts to reach the base station receiver  The output will reset when the first   Kiss Off  has been received  This output will not operate for domestic formats     Dialler Disabled   This output will operate as long as Option 1 in  LOCATION 177  on page 145 has  been disabled  The output will reset once Option 1     Enable 
35.   Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 167 to program zones for  lockout dialler     Only alarms triggered from zone inputs will increment the swinger shutdown counter  This  means alarms such as codepad panic  code retries and any other system alarms will not effect  the swinger shutdown count     While the sirens are operating  the counter for the dialler is only incremented by the first zone  that causes the alarm  Any other zones that are triggered during siren time will not effect the  counter  While the dialler is on line  its counter is only incremented by the first zone that  causes the alarm  Any other zones that are triggered while the dialler is on line will not effect  the counter     When the swinger shutdown count  As programmed in  LOCATION 324   has been reached   all zones that have been triggered will be locked out according to their individual lockout  settings     e If  Lockout Dialler  has been enabled for any zone  the last restore signal will not be    transmitted until the system has been disarmed     Example  All eight zones have been programmed for lockout dialler with a swinger shutdown count of 6   If zone 1 triggers an alarm  the swinger shutdown count will decrement by one at the time the  control panel makes the call to a swinger shutdown count of 5     If zone 1 re triggers the dialler  the swinger shutdown count will be decremented by one to a  swinger shutdown count of 4  If zone 1 re triggers the dialler 3 more times  the swinger  shutdown count 
36.   System Armed In AWAY Mode    Alarm In Zone 3  Alarm In Zone 4         System Disarmed    Table 40  Event Memory Recall   Example Events       The event memory playback will report as follows     Event No Codepad Indicator Event Description      4   All Indicators Off Except MAINS System Disarmed    Zone 4   AWAY Indicator Illuminates   Alarm In Zone 4  Zone 3   AWAY Indicator Illuminates   Alarm In Zone 3  AWAY Indicator Illuminates System Armed In AWAY Mode       Table 41  Event Memory Recall   Example Event Playback    A beep and an illuminated codepad indicator indicate each event  Resetting a 24 hour alarm in  the disarmed state is indicated by one beep only  After the last event  three beeps will be heard  to indicate the end of playback  The replay of event memory can be terminated at any time by       pressing the AWAY  button     If the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2  the STAY indicator will display  during the event memory playback  There is no differentiation between arming the  system in STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2     If the control panel has been powered down  the memory of all events will be lost     Reserved    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions 107    Hold Down functions    Hold down functions have been incorporated to allow easy activation of specific operations   When a button is held down for two seconds  two beeps will be heard and a particular function  will operate  The hold down functions available are 
37.   This output  event type will reset once exit time has expired     The next time this output event type will operate will be during entry time and will  reset once entry time has expired or the system has been disarmed  This output  event type will also operate if a zone has triggered when the system has been armed  in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 only if the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode  has been programmed in  LOCATION 404   405  on page 205     Exit Warning   This output operates during exit time when the system has been armed in AWAY  Mode  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2  The output will reset once exit time has  expired     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programmable Outputs    08    09    0  x    0 Cs       24     193    Exit Warning Finished   This output operates when the exit time has expired when the system has been  armed in AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2  The output will reset  when the system has been disarmed     Kiss Off After Exit Time   This output will operate after the first successful transmission to the base station  receiver when exit time has expired  The output will reset when the system has been  disarmed     Entry Warning   This output will operate when either Entry Timer 1  Entry Timer 2 or Entry Guard  Timer For STAY Mode are operating  The output will reset when the entry time  expires     Entry Warning   Day Alarm Resetting  This output combines both Entry Warning and Day Alarm Resetting so that either of  these two even
38.   Time  enano te RR D QE 206  Silent                                        ae EE En a En ES 168  232  Siren  amp  Strobe In STAY Mode                                    221  Siren R  n Times                             207  Siren Sound  R  t  e            estere  207  Smart Watch    tte oin Dag 215  Software Version Number                      sss 243  Solution Codepad Mimic Board                                   226  Specifications            cesessesseeseeee eene 243  ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    STAY Indicator    e a reet 45  48  STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status            219  STAY Mode Js    eee entis 233                      54  107             sedentes oH oni mie ies 56  STAY Mode 2    sheet rites 233  ATED eiie need          e den 57  107                      ee es 58  Setting ZONES seio en bs 85  101  Strobe Output    es eine pr ete ees 190  Strobe             ern e ee 108  Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1                         133  Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2                         136  Swinger Shutdown Count  For Daaller         nete teret 174  For Siren  i sento eene Dope 173  System                                       pete 211  System Disarmed Indicator                         eese 48  System Operations  icsse nee e tetra 52  Arming In AWAY Mode                          eee 52  Arming In STAY Mode 1                      sese 54  Arming In STAY Mode 2                   sese 57  Disarming From AWAY                     
39.   When the control panel needs to transmit a report  the control panel will dial this number in an  attempt to contact the monitoring station or pager etc  If the call is successful  the relevant  information will be transmitted and the dialler will return back to the stand by mode     If unsuccessful  the dialler will attempt two more times using the primary telephone number for  receiver 1  after which the secondary telephone number for receiver   will be called three  times  If the dialling sequence is still unsuccessful  the control panel will then attempt to  repeat this procedure dialling the primary telephone number and the secondary telephone  number for receiver 2 if programmed     This procedure will be repeated only once again  i e  Maximum of 12 call attempts per alarm   after ten minutes if none of the first 6 attempts were successful if only the primary telephone  number and secondary telephone number for receiver   has been programmed     If the primary telephone number and secondary telephone numbers for both receiver 1 and  receiver 2 have been programmed  a maximum of 24 call attempts per alarm will be made     Contact your monitoring station or pager company for the relevant telephone numbers before  programming these locations     When Receiver 2 has been set up for domestic reporting  telephone numbers  programmed into these locations will be ignored  Refer to Changing Domestic Phone  Numbers on page 78 when using the Installer Code function and Changing 
40.   the momentary keyswitch input  Arming and disarming the system in AWAY Mode will not  be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected     Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 1    If this option has been selected  the system will arm in STAY Mode 1 when using the  momentary keyswitch input  Arming the system in AWAY Mode or disarming the system will  not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected     Momentary Disarm From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2    If this option has been selected  the system will only disarm the system from STAY Mode 1 or  STAY Mode 2 when using the momentary keyswitch input  Arming the system in STAY  Mode 1  STAY Mode 2 or arming and disarming the system from AWAY Mode will not be  permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected     imm LC    EOL KEY SWITCH   MOMENTARY TOGGLE     Figure 10  Wiring Diagram For Keyswitch Zone    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Zone Information    171    Zone Options 2    When programming this location  you will notice that there are four options per location  You  may select one  two  three or all four of these options  however  only one number needs to be  programmed  This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together  Program a  seven  7  if you require options 1  2 and 4 simultaneously  i e  1  2   4   7      Option   Description    Isolate In STAY Mode 1    Zone Isolation Allowed    4   Forced Arming Allowed    8   Zone Resto
41.  1             131  Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2             134  Programming Telephone Numbers                           130  Ring Count    niece hec het ree ites 140  Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1         131  Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2         134  Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1                     133  Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2                     136  Telco Arming Sequence                       sese 138  Telco Disarming Sequence                          sess 139  Telephone Line Fault Options                                  141  Transmission Format For Receiver 1                        133  Transmission Format For Receiver 2                        136  Dialler Options 1  Allow Dialler Reporting Functions                           145    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    257  Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed    145  Disable Dialler Reporting Functions                        145  Remote Arming Via Telephone                               145  Dialler Options 2  Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete               146  Extend Time To Wait For Handshake                      146  Open Close Reports In STAY Mode                       146  Open Close Reports Only If Previous Alarm Has                                  we ae ie eS 146  Dialler Options 3  Change Decadic Dialling To 60 40                          147  Set DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Second         147  Dialler Reporting Formats      
42.  1900 Hz  5   Pager  3   2300 Hz  Low Speed Sescoa      EC OM c NEC EM CC EM Page 136  Transmission Format For Receiver 2         Contact ID 5   Basic Pager  2   4   2 Express 6   Reserved  3   FSK 300 Baud 7   Reserved  4   Domestic 8   Reserved  Location 074   079  lt  lt  lt  VVV Page 136  Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2 o  o oj o  o  o  Tocation 080 O        a io emu ve UE TOT eee gray Page 137  talli 1   Australian DTMF  5 Digits Second  4   International DTMF  Dialling Format 2   Australian Decadic 5   Reversed Decadic  3   Alternate DTMF  amp  Decadic  AUST  6   Alternate DTMF  amp  Reversed Decadic  Location 081   112 uc c  0990 000 00 0909 0 00 0 0 00 0004 Page 137  Reserved                    138    Telco Arming Sequence    Location 143     158 Page 139  To Deering que                                   Location 159 174     6   o 000 CUR ee Oe ee H Page 139  Call Back Telephone Number                                                     ged ry svi gegen Prot int inte va    Pedy o tes ge qo Tode Jen HR Page 140  Ring Count 0   Panel Will Not Answer 14   Answering Machine Bypass 2    1   13   No Of Rings Until Panel Answers 15   Answering Machine Bypass 1  LocalioniZ8      0 9 0   RR UM Page 141  Telephone Line Fault Options 1   Display FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails        2   Sound Alarm When System Is Armed  4   Sound Alarm When System Is Disarmed  8   Reserved    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Solution 862 Programming She
43.  220 will  need to be enabled     If an alarm has occurred or entry warning has been triggered  a valid user code will need to be  used to disarm the system     Refer to Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones using the Installer Code function on page 85 or Setting  STAY Mode 2 Zones using the Master Code function on page 101 for more information     Horn Speaker Test    Holding the l button down until two beeps are heard will sound the horn speaker for a two   1 second burst  No other sounding device will sound in this mode     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    108    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Bell Test    Holding the 2 button down until two beeps are heard will sound the internal screamers for a  two second burst  No other sounding device will sound in this mode     If an EDMSAT  55914  has been connected to the control panel  this function will test both the  horn speaker and the strobe connected to the satellite siren for a two second burst   Strobe Test    Holding the    button down will operate the strobe  No other device will operate in this mode     If an EDMSAT  SS914  has been connected to the control panel  this function will also test the  strobe on the satellite siren   How To Turn Strobe Test ON    1  Hold down the    button until three beeps are heard   The strobe will begin to flash     How To Turn Strobe Test OFF    1  Hold down the    button until two beeps are heard   The strobe will stop flashing     Turning Day Alarm On 
44.  4   AWAY Indicator Illuminates   Alarm In Zone 4  Zone 3   AWAY Indicator Illuminates   Alarm In Zone 3  AWAY Indicator Illuminates System Armed In AWAY Mode       Table 32  Event Memory Recall   Example Event Playback    A beep and an illuminated codepad indicator indicate each event  Resetting a 24 hour alarm in  the disarmed state is indicated by one beep only  After the last event  three beeps will be heard  to indicate the end of playback  The replay of event memory can be terminated at any time by       pressing the AWAY  button     If the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2  the STAY indicator will display  the event memory playback  There is no differentiation between arming the system in  STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2     If the control panel has been powered down  the memory of all events will be lost     Reserved    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions    Master Code Functions    E    Master Code Functions are designed to allow those users that have the appropriate priority  level to perform certain functions of a supervisory level  These functions can only be carried  out when the system is in the disarmed state     The default Master Code is 2 5 8 O and is known as User Code 1  It is possible for  the system to have multiple Master Codes  Refer to  User Code Priority  on page 153 for  more information     To enter the required Master Code function  enter the  MASTER CODE  followed by the required     FUNCTION  digit and th
45.  Armed    The Solution 862 control panel allows for test reports to be transmitted to the base station  receiver to verify that the dialler functional  So what you might say  as most alarm diallers  allow you to do this     The one problem with this is that installations that report opening and closing reports will  generally also transmit a test report each day  This call is unnecessary  as a successful opening  and closing report means that the dialler is functioning correctly     The Solution 862 control panel allows you to save time and money by providing test  reports only while the system is in the armed state     Program  LOCATION 428  on page 219 with Option 1  Send test reports only if the system is  armed   and then set the test report time to be in the middle of the day  During Monday to  Friday when the premises are generally open and the system disarmed a test report will not be  transmitted  However  on the weekend  the premises will be closed and the system armed  so a  test report will be transmitted at the programmed time thus verifying the operation of the  dialler     At first glance this may not seem to be a big deal but lets do a few sums and you will see just  where savings can be made     Let us assume that the customer wants  needs or has test reports programmed for once a day as  well as opening and closing reports  This means that at least three phone calls will be made  each week day and one call on Saturday and one call on Sunday     By using the S
46.  Button Disarming                      esee 220  Consumer Options 3  Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps                                     221  Operation Of Siren  amp  Strobe In STAY Mode          221  Use Digit 3 For Duress Instead Of Digit 9               221  Contact ID                                          124  Control Panel To Power Up Disarmed                         218  Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key     34  Copy From Programming Key To Control Panel           35  D  Date and                                            64  104  211  Day Alarm  enemies aed ave 156  231  Latching   2  eta ated tiie tees 156  Operation    tied ete hee 157                 ete ORE 156  Status Indicator                   sssseeeeene 219  Turning On Off                 esses 108  Decadic Dialling To 60 40                                           147  Defaulting The Control                                            33  42  Delay Alarm Reporting                                                205  Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete                   146  Detectors  lees                 231                   eae teet ie 231  Dialler Information  Answering Machine Bypass                       eese 140  Call Back Telephone                                               139  Dialling Format                     esee 137  Handshake Tone For Receiver 1                              132  Handshake Tone For Receiver 2                               135  Primary Telephone Number For Receiver
47.  CC816  to  remotely program the control panel  The control panel will not respond to the Alarm Link  Software if this option is not selected  Refer to Alarm Link Software on page 114 for more  information     Call Back Phone Number Required For Upload Download    2 If this option has been selected and a call back telephone number has been programmed  the  remote programming computer must be connected to the telephone line that has been  programmed in the call back telephone number in    LOCATION 159   174    on page 139     If this option is not selected  it will allow the installer to connect to their customers control  panel from any remote location when attempting upload download operations without the need  to wait for the control panel to call back to the remote computer  but still allows the ability for  the customer to initiate the modem call from the codepad when requested by holding down the       button  Refer to Alarm Link Software on page 114 for more information     Terminate Upload Download On Alarm    4 If the control panel is communicating with a remote computer via Alarm Link Software   CC816  and an alarm has registered  the    Alarm Link    session will be terminated and the  relevant alarm message will then be transmitted to the base station receiver     If an alarm occurs that does not need to report to the base station receiver  the session will not  be terminated  If this option has not been selected and an alarm has registered  the Alarm Link  softwar
48.  Date and Time                      sse 104  Turning Outputs ON OFF                      eee 102  Walk  Test Mode ia eem eoi 105  Medical Al  rin  toit Ett o tes 59  Modem  Call    mde teu bere 109  Modem Module    desc terit 117  Monitoring Station oe ee eeeeeceseceseceseeeseeeeeeeeeees 232  N  New Zealand Telepermit                                                244  Night Arm Station    cc ceeceeeseeceeeeeeseeceeeeeeneeeeee 218  225      OFF Indicator Zone Sealed                                  sss 49  ON Indicator Zone In Alarm                         eene 49  Open Close Reports                            179  In STAY Mode                                146  Only If Previous Alarm Has Occurred                      146  Reporting Options                eseseeeeeeeee 179  Operating Remote Outputs Via Transmitter                   73  Option Bits iie DEOS DIE 28  Optional Equipment  2 Channel Radio                                                         224  2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface                              227  304 Mhz RF Receiver                                   224  Alarm Link Software                    sse 225  Cellular Diallers                                  226  CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad                                 225  CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad                                 225  EDMSAT   Satellite Siren    eee eee 225  Hand Held Dialler Tester                                          226  Hand Held Programmer                          sess 225  
49.  Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programming    35    Command 963   Copy From Programming Key To Control Panel    This command is used to copy data from the programming key to the control panel  Only the  Programming Key  CC891  may be used with the Solut ion 862 control panel     How To Copy The Programming Key Memory To The Control Panel    1  Enter Installer s Programming Mode  i e  1 2 3 4 followed by the   button    Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash on the  remote codepad to indicate that you have entered Installer   s Programming Mode  You  will also notice that the remote codepad will display the data currently programmed in     LOCATION 000        2  Connect the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the  control panel found at the top of the PCB  printed circuit board  next to the Auxiliary  Module socket     3  Enter command 9    3 followed by the   button   Two beeps will be heard after the programming key s data has successfully been copied  into to the control panel  If you heard a long beep after issuing this command  the  programming key has become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt  data  Refer to Command 964   Erase Programming Key on page 36 for more  information     4  Before removing the programming key from the control panel  enter command    9 6 O followed by the   button to exit Installer s Programming Mode  The STAY  and AWAY indicators will now extinguish on the r
50.  Handshake Tones For Receiver 1       ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Dialler Information 133  Transmission Format For Receiver 1    LOCATION 033 1    Enter the desired transmission format here  This location selects the data format that will be  transmitted to the base station receiver  This location also allows you to configure the control  panel for domestic or basic pager formats     m Transmission Format Option Transmission Format    4   2 Express Basic Pager         pmxowsassur                   Table 55  Transmission Formats For Receiver 1    Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1  LOCATION 034     039 000000    This number is transmitted to identify the calling control panel  Enter the desired Subscriber  ID Number in the six locations provided  For Basic Pager Format   LOCATION 034     036   will be ignored and the first digit of the Subscriber ID Number required must start in   LOCATION 037   When using Domestic Dialling Format  the number of identification  beeps will be the number that is programmed in  LOCATION 039   This gives the ability to  identify between 15 different control panels calling the same telephone number       xample    If you wish to program the Subscriber ID Number as 4729  you would program the six  locations as follows     004729    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    134    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2    LOCATION 040   055    0000000000000000  
51.  Hold  the phone controller to the mouthpiece of the telephone and press the button on the side    of the unit for 3 seconds  You can alternatively press the    button on the touch tone  telephone for 3 seconds to arm the system     If you hear a number of strange sounding tones when the control panel answers the  incoming call  this means that the system has been programmed for remote  programming functions  Simply wait for a pause in the tones and follow step 2 to  remotely arm the system     3  After releasing the button on the phone controller or the   button on the touch tone  telephone  two beeps will be heard to indicate that the system has armed in AWAY  Mode    4  Hang up the telephone and the system will remain armed     If the control panel does not answer the call  this means that the system may already be armed   remote functions have not been enabled or the ring count has been set to zero  Refer to Option  2 in  LOCATION 177  on page 145 to enable remote arming via the telephone and   LOCATION 175  on page 140 to set the number of rings before the control panel will  answer     Where both remote arming and Upload Download via the Installer   s remote computer  have been selected  the control panel will answer the call expecting the remote  computer  This is easily noticed  as the modem negotiating tones will be heard rather  than the remote arming jingle     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Alarm Link Operations       This section includes the
52.  If there is no call forward sequence programmed  a further two beeps will be heard after    entering this mode  These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call  forward sequence has been displayed     3  Enter  stay  6 1 followed by the you wish the control panel to divert all    calls to followed by  sv   and the button  Two beeps will be heard and the  system will return to the disarmed state     gc  RSTALERCODE   3            1    aww     61  ESE   Feb   a       Example  If you wish to automatically divert all unanswered incoming calls to another telephone number   e g   9672 1777  when the system is armed in AWAY Mode  follow the example sequence  below and replace the telephone number mentioned in the manual with the telephone number  that you wish to divert all calls to     F 1234  3     1           How To Disable The Telco Arming Sequence          If at any time you wish to cancel the telco arming sequence  you may enter your     INSTALLER CODE  followed by 3 and the button  followed by 1 and the  AWAY  YJ button   then the  stay  button followed by the 4 and the button             RSMERCODE   3 fm   1                Sv    4            Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    82    ISSUE130                    Solution 862 Installation Manual    How To Program The Telco Disarming Sequence     Easy Call Forward  No Answer Off     1  Enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by           the  AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and
53.  Limited ISSUE130    56     m    Method One    a    Method Two    y    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Disarming The System From STAY Mode 7    There are two methods for disarming the system from STAY Mode 1  Method one is standard  and will always operate  Method two is optional and needs Option 4 to be enabled in   LOCATION 429  on page 220     Method two will not operate unless both Option 2 and Option 4 has been enabled in   LOCATION 429  on page 220     How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 7  1  Enter your followed by the  stay  button     Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will extinguish  The system is now  disarmed           CODE     STAY     A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone  If this is the case  a valid  user code will need to be used to disarm the system using method one  To enable method two   Option 4 in  LOCATION 429  on page 220 will need to be enabled     How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 7    1  Hold down the button until two beeps are heard   The STAY indicator will extinguish and the system is now disarmed      STAY     Single button disarming from STAY Mode 1 will report as user code number 16     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Operations    57    Arming The System In STAY Mode 2    Arming the system in STAY Mode 2 is only used when the perimeter and unused areas of the  premises need to be armed to detect any would be intruder from entering the premises  at t
54.  N C Contacts    Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using N O Contacts     Zone Programming       Solution 862 Zones Defaults      Zone Types     Zone Pulse Count     Zone Pulse Count Handover      Zone Pulse Count Time     Zone Options 1      Keyswitch Zone Options     Zone Options 2      Zone Reporting Information      Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren       Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler    156 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Day Alarm Zones  LOCATION 265 0    When programming this location  you will notice that there are four options per location  You  may select one  two  three or all four of these options  however  only one number needs to be  programmed  This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together  Program a  seven  7  if you require options 1  2 and 4 simultaneously  i e  1  2 4 7      Day Alarm Zone       Table 69  Day Alarm Zones 1   4    Day alarm allows a combination of zones to be monitored while the system is in the disarmed  state  Indications are available via any of the programmable outputs including the codepad  buzzer  This function has been expanded to accommodate latching and non latching day alarm  output event types     When the system has been armed in AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2  zones  that have been programmed as day alarm zones will activate the sirens and dialler just as non  day alarm zones do  When day alarm has been activated  it will ignore any zone pulse count  settings that have been programmed for th
55.  Option 2 in  LOCATION  429  to be enabled on page 220     If you require to isolate a zone s  prior to arming the system in AWAY Mode  refer to Isolating  Zones on page 60     Single button arming in AWAY Mode will report as user code number 16     How To Arm The System In AWAY Mode    1  Enter your followed by the AWAY  button     Two beeps will be heard and the AWAY indicator will illuminate  Exit time will now  commence           CODE    AWAY     How To Arm The System In AWAY Mode    1  Hold down the  Away  button until two beeps are heard   The AWAY indicator will illuminate and exit time will now commence  Refer to Option  2 in  LOCATION 429  on page 220 to enable single button arming in AWAY Mode     If a zone is not sealed at the end of exit time  the zone will be automatically isolated and will  be constantly illuminated on the remote codepad  The zone will become an active part of the  system again as soon as it has resealed  i e  If a window is left open after exit time has expired   the window will not be an active part of the system until it has closed  Opening the window  after exit time has expired will cause an alarm condition       AWAY    Forced Arming  The feature of arming the system when a zone is not sealed is known as forced arming  Refer    to Zone Options 2 on page 171 to enable forced arming for each zone     If the AWAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard when attempting to arm the  system in AWAY Mode  forced arming is not permit
56.  Street   6   Red  Telecom Line  Street     3 amp 4  Not Used             PONES m ZONE 2 3K3  Ld   72 P am m  ZONE 6 6K8   GND      Power To External Equipment  12v   400 mA  n PIR  ZONE 3  Lt    LINK BETWEEN   12V AND COMM    HORN                   YELLOW STROBE SPEAKER  GREEN  RED CODEPAD  CP  Black   Sl        m               a   gt  YELLOW    ON  zo YELLOW       GREEN 18VAC 1 3A  J n Plug Pack      TF008        Figure 12  Solution 862 Wiring Diagram    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Terminals and Descriptions 235  Solution 862 Component Overlay    OUT   Internal Phone Line  OUT   Internal Phone Line    Socket For  IN   Telecom Line  Street  Termination For Telecom Lead  IN   Telecom Line  Street  Phone Line Connection    v v                 lt   Battery Input    e  Q   O  Receiver e   lt   Interface Zone  Connection E Termination  Strip  4 e             Zia Phone Amplifier or  amp   xo Direct Link Cable Q   lt 4 RELAY  CONTACT     SELECT Q  24        e    Programming Key or  gt 50   gt  82  e        lt   Hand Held Programmer  8 Output  g Plugs In Here    Termination  xq e Strip  o et E                 E    f z     lt  e  DEFAULT ad un T Q  SWITCH       Q  li e       S    3 Amp 1 Amp 1 Amp  Battery Fuse Accessory Fuse Codepad Fuse         Plug Pack Input   EDM   TFO08           Figure 14  Solution 862 Component Overlay    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    236 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Telecom Connection Dia
57.  To Programming Key               34  BLASG sete UU CAU ERR 36         een Gan e et e neret tly 31  Programming Sheets  Solution404      ois ster Eee doit Ies 245  PS100 Power Supply                                                 226  Q  Quick Starte a IL RR eens 18  ISSUE130    260    R  Radio Input Options                      esee 222  Latching Keyswitch Input                         eese 222  Momentary Keyswitch Input                          esses 222  Radio Receiver          oe eere ertet reet 222  Radio Key Keyswitch Interface                           218  227  Receiver 1  Handshake                                      132  Primary Telephone                                                    131  Secondary Telephone                                              131  Subscriber ID Number                      esee 133  Transmission Format                      esee 133  Receiver 2  Handshake Tone                        eee 135  Primary Telephone                                                 134  Secondary Telephone Number                                134  Subscriber ID Number                         eese 136  Transmission Format                    eee 136  Relay  Outputs  unie tnmen tern      190  Remote Arming Via Telephone                            112  145  Remote Operation Of Outputs Via Transmitter             73  Remote Radio Transmitter Codes  Deleting Transmitter Codes                                 ss 93  Remote Radio Transmitter Operations                
58.  command required  enter the    corresponding numerical code followed by the   button     Command Description    Enable Disable Zone Status Mode  Test Programming Key    960   Exit Installer   s Programming Mode    961 Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default Settings    Copy The Control Panel Memory To The Programming  Key    Copy The Programming Key Data To The Control  Panel    Erase Programming Key    Set Up Domestic Dialling Format   Enable Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations  During Programming   This Command Displays The Control Panel   s Software  Version Number Or Control Panel Type       Table 5  Installer s Programming Commands    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    30    ISSUE130    Example    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Command 958   Enable Disable Zone Status Mode    This function enables and disables the zone status display mode when using the hand held  programmer  The hand held programmer will display the zones on the seven segment display  from left to right  If there is a dash illuminated on the display of the hand held programmer   the corresponding zone is unsealed and if the display is blank  the zone is sealed     The third  or centre  display shows either the number 4 or the number 8  The number 4  constantly illuminated indicates that zones     4 are being displayed  The number 8 constantly  illuminated indicates that zones 5   8 are being displayed     Pressing the   button will toggle the display between the z
59.  direct connect  method of programming or operating the control panel will operate regardless of this option  being set     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Alarm Link Operations 117    Alarm Link Options    LOCATION 180 3    Description    Enable Upload Download Via Alarm Link    Enable Alarm Link Call Back    Terminate Alarm Link Connection On Alarm      8 Use External Modem Module  CC811  For Alarm Link Operations      Table 44  Alarm Link Options       Enable Upload Download Via Alarm Link    1 This option will need to be selected if you require to use the Alarm Link Software  CC816  to  remotely program the control panel  The control panel will not respond to the Alarm Link  Software if this option is not selected  Refer to Alarm Link Software on page 114 for more  information     Enable Alarm Link Call Back    2 If this option has been selected and    call back telephone number has been programmed  the  remote programming computer must be connected to the telephone line that has been  programmed in the call back telephone number in    LOCATION 159   174    on page 139     If this option is not selected  it will allow the installer to connect to their customers control  panel from any remote location when attempting upload download operations without the need  to wait for the control panel to call back to the remote computer  but still allows the ability for  the customer to initiate the modem call from the codepad when requested by holding down the   
60.  either the direct connect method or the remote connect method via the telephone line   All options and features can be accessed using this software as well as maintaining history and  service reports  Refer to  LOCATION 180  on page 117 or 148 to enable this feature  Refer  to Alarm Link Software on page 114 for more information on the remote connect methods     CP5 Fight Zone LED Codepad  CP508     This codepad is designed to operate with the Solut ion range of control panels  This codepad  provides indications for up to 8 zones         5 Fight Zone LCD Codepad  CP508L     This codepad is designed to operate with the Solut ion range of control panels with a fixed  icon display  This codepad provides indications for up to 8 zones     Night Arm Station  CP105     The night arm station incorporates a panic button and is designed to allow system operation  from a bedroom or sitting room to arm and disarm the system in STAY Mode 1  Refer to  Option 8 in    LOCATION 427    on page 218 to enable the night arm station to operate with the  system     Phone Controller  CC91 I     The phone controller operates at a frequency of 1400 Hz and allows the user to remotely arm  the system in AWAY Mode via the telephone  This phone controller can also be used to  acknowledge a phone call from the control panel when the system is set up for domestic  dialling     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    226    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Hand Held Diall
61.  following        Alarm Link Software      Remote Connect      Remote Connect With Customer Control      Remote Connect Without Call Back Verification     Remote Connect With Call Back Verification      Direct Connect      Alarm Link Options    114    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Alarm Link Software    ISSUE130    The Solut ion 862 control panel can be remotely programmed or controlled via an IBM or  compatible personal computer via the Alarm Link Software  CC816   This facility will allow  you to make alterations to your customers control panel without the need to leave your office   thus improving customer service and saving you time and money  For country locations where  a control panel may be situated hundreds of kilometres from your office  the Upload Download  feature is invaluable     When selecting the control panel type during the setup of a new customer database in the    Alarm Link Software  refer to the table below to select the software version number that  corresponds to the control panel type required     Control Panels Software Version Select Panel Type    Solution 862 V1 00     1 02 5406 VIO    Table 43  Alarm Link Panel Forms       After selecting the correct panel type when adding a new customer in the Alarm Link Software   the Subscriber ID Number and the Installer Code must match that of the control panel for  synchronisation when making connection to the control panel  If these two locations do not  match that of the control panel  the computer a
62.  for sensor  watch  Refer to  LOCATION 408   409  on page 206 for setting how many days  before a zone can register as a faulty sensor watch zone     Codepad Medical Alarm  This output will operate when a codepad medical alarm has been activated by    pressing the 7 and    buttons simultaneously on the remote codepad  This output  will reset once a valid user code has been entered at the remote codepad     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programmable Outputs    19    1 Eo    11    1     1 25     20    2 1    2 2    195    Codepad Fire Alarm  This output will operate when a codepad medical alarm has been activated by    pressing the 4 and 6 buttons on the remote codepad simultaneously  This output  will reset once a valid user code has been entered at the remote codepad     Codepad Panic Alarm  This output will operate when a codepad panic alarm  audible or silent  has been    activated by pressing the l and 3 buttons or the  stay  and  away  buttons on the    remote codepad simultaneously  This output will reset once a valid user code has  been entered at the remote codepad     Codepad Duress Alarm    This output will operate when a duress alarm has been activated by adding a 9 to  the end of the user code being used to disarm the system  This output will reset the  next time the system has been armed     Codepad Tamper     Access Denied   This output will operate when the wrong code has been entered more times than  allowed  Refer to  LOCATION 356  on pag
63.  has failed and two beeps indicates a successful test     If the programming key has been removed before the test is complete or the programming key  has failed  the data in the programming key has become corrupt  Remember not to remove the  programming key while the activity LED is constantly illuminated or pulsing rapidly     How To Test The Programming Ney    1     Enter Installer s Programming Mode  i e  1234 followed by the   button     Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash on the  remote codepad to indicate that you have entered Installer   s Programming Mode  You  will also notice that the remote codepad will display the data currently programmed in     LOCATION 000        Plug the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control  panel found at the top of the PCB  printed circuit board  next to the Auxiliary Module  socket     Enter command 9 5    followed by the   button    Two beeps will be heard after the programming key has successfully been tested  If you  heard a long beep after issuing this command  the programming key has become corrupt  and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt data  Refer to Command 964   Erase  Programming Key on page 36 for more information     Before removing the programming key from the control panel  enter command    9 6 0 followed by the   button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode  Two  beeps will be heard  The STAY and AWAY indicators will now extinguish on the remo
64.  has five  seven segment displays  The three seven  segment displays on the left display the current location number and the two seven segment  displays on the right display the data for the location currently being displayed     To connect the hand held programmer  locate the socket marked PROGRAMMING KEY  found at the top of the PCB  printed circuit board  next to the Auxiliary Module socket   Observe the triangular markings on the PCB and line them up with the markings on the  hand held programmers connecting socket     When the hand held programmer is correctly connected onto the printed circuit board  one  beep will be heard and four centre bars on the hand held programmer will illuminate with  either an  A  or  U  suffix to indicate the system is armed or unarmed  Only when the  Installer s Programming Mode has been accessed will any numerals appear on the display     When connecting the hand held programmer to the control panel  make sure that the  switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position and that no external  programming key has been connected  Failing to do this may corrupt the control panel s  memory  If this occurs  the control panel will need to be returned to Electronics Design  and Manufacturing Pty Limited where a service fee will be charged to unlock the control  panel s memory     To access the Installer s Programming Mode  enter the  INSTALLER CODE  followed by the      button  The factory default Installers Code is 1234  Two beeps will be h
65.  i e   Decimal point illuminated when using the hand held programmer      Press    followed by the   button    This will position you at  LOCATION 000  being the start of the Primary Telephone Number  For Receiver 1       0     2                    6      7      2      1     foJl4   65    65     0         Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programming 39    Example   Auto Step Disabled   To enter the Primary Telephone Number  02 pause 9672 1055  with auto step disabled  i e   Decimal point extinguished when using the hand held programmer      Press    followed by the   button    This will position you at  LOCATION 000  being the start of the Primary Telephone Number  For Receiver 1       o       2          4 5      4349     H   6       7      424     4 14         oJ      5      5      0         Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    40    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Command 999   Display Panel Type Or Software Version Number    When using this command via the remote codepad  the codepad will display the panel version  of the control panel  As there are two different control panel   s using the same PCB  it is  difficult to know which control panel the PCB has been set up to be     The codepad will display a 6 indicating the software of the control panel  Refer to the    Table  7  Control Panel Type    below for more information     Indicator Control Panel Type    Table 7  Control Panel Type    When using this command 
66.  in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2  The output  will reset when the system has been disarmed     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    196    ISSUE130    23    24    25    26    27    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Alarm When In AWAY Mode   This output will operate whenever an audible or silent zone alarm has triggered  when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode  The output will reset when the  system has been disarmed     Mimic System Fault   This output will operate without any time delays as soon as any system fault occurs  including if the AC mains supply has failed  The output will reset as soon as the  system fault or the AC mains supply has restored     Fire Alarm Resetting  This output will operate when a 24 hour fire zone is triggered  The output will reset  once a valid user code has been entered or when siren run time expires     Fire Alarm Latching  This output will operate when a 24 hour fire zone has triggered and will reset when  the system has been armed or disarmed     Fire Alarm Verification   This feature is used on some commercial fire control panels to reduce false alarms  on smoke detectors  It is conceptually very similar to zone pulse count as used in  some motion detectors  Basically  a fire zone is allotted a pulse count of 3 pulses  over a period of 3 minutes     If the smoke detector trips  the voltage to the smoke detector is disconnected for 15  seconds and then reapplied  No alarm has registered     If within 3 minutes o
67.  no reporting at all     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Reporting Information 187    Test Reporting Time    LOCATION 360   366    y      xample    0000 71 0    Location Description    Actual Hour Of The Day  Tens Digit   Actual Hour Of The Day  Units Digit     Actual Minute Of The Day  Tens Digit     Test Report Code  Tens Digit     Test Report Code  Units Digit     Repeat Interval In Days    Table 99  Test Reporting Time Locations       363 Actual Minute Of The Day  Units Digit     A  Test  report  Contact ID Event Code 602  is a specific signal that is transmitted to the base  station receiver and is normally used to test the dialling and reporting functions of the control  panel  Test reports will not be transmitted if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000     When programming test reports  the control panel needs to know the hour and minute of the  day the report is required  as well as how often to transmit the report  Test reports are reported  on a daily basis ranging from every day to every fifteen days  Refer to  Installer Code  Functions  on page 76 to set the first test report     If you do not require  Test  reports  program the repeat interval in  LOCATION 366  as  zero     If you wish to send test reports once every seven days at 11 35 PM  you would program     LOCATION 360   366    as follows     2335 71 7    Test Reporting Dialler Options    LOCATION 367    1    Description    No Report Required    Receiver 1    Receiver 2    Re
68.  of twelve call  attempts per event to call the base station receiver  If both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 have the  primary telephone number and secondary telephone number programmed  the maximum  number of calls will total 24 providing that the event is allocated to report on both receivers      The control panel will attempt to call the base station receiver up to six times using both the  primary telephone number and the secondary telephone number  Only three times if the  primary telephone number is programmed   If at this stage the control panel has failed to  communicate to the base station receiver  a communications fault will occur and the control  panel will wait 10 minutes before attempting to report to the base station receiver for a further  6 attempts  The communication fault will reset on the next successful call attempt     If Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 is set up for domestic reporting  the control panel will not  display a fault if failed to report after the maximum of six call attempts     If Option 1 in  LOCATION 177  on page 145 is enabled and there are no telephone  numbers programmed  no fault condition will occur     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    66    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    AC Mains Failure    An AC mains supply failure will automatically flash the MAINS indicator  If the AC mains  supply has been disconnected continuously for more than two minutes  the remote codepad  will beep the codepad buzzer onc
69.  output will not operate unless Option 1 in    LOCATION  176    on page 141 has been enabled     Kiss Off Received  This output will operate after the control panel has successfully transmitted to the  receiving party     Fuse Fail  This output will operate when either the 1 Amp codepad fuse or the 1 Amp  accessories fuse fails  The output will reset once the faulty fuse has been replaced     AC Fail   This output will operate as soon as the AC mains has failed  The output will reset as  soon as the AC mains has restored  This output will operate regardless of Option 2  in  LOCATION 426  on page 217 being set     Low Battery   This output will operate when a dynamic battery test detects that the battery has  failed or the battery voltage has fallen below 10 5 volts  The dynamic battery test is  performed every four hours from when the system has been powered up or every  time the system has been armed in AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2     This output will reset only after a dynamic battery test reports the backup battery has  restored     Horn Speaker Monitor Fail   If Option 2     Enable Monitoring Of Horn Speaker in  LOCATION 424  on page  215 has been selected  this output will operate when the horn speaker has been  disconnected  The output will reset when the horn speaker has been reconnected     Sensor Watch Alarm   This output will operate when the sensor watch count has been reached  Refer to  Zone Options   on page 167 for more information on programming zones
70.  output will reset when all zones are sealed or the system has been disarmed  Chime  zones will not operate this output event type     AC Mains 60 Hz Or 50 Hz  This output will activate when the AC mains supply frequency is at 60 Hz  The  output will reset once the AC mains supply has returned to 50 Hz     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programmable Outputs 199    Output Polarity    There are fifteen different polarities to choose from  Each polarity is designated by a number   This number needs to be programmed into the appropriate location of the output being used to  indicate how the output should operate     Option Polarity Option Polarity    Normally Open  Going Low EE XE Normally Low  Going Open  Normally Open  Pulsing Low        Normally Low  Pulsing Open      4  NemalyOpen One Shot Low  Retigge    11   Normally Low  One Shot Open  euiggen   6  Normally Open  One Shot Low  Alam        13  NormallyLow OneShorOpen Mam            Table 101  Event Type Polarities    Output Not Used    0 If an output is not required for use  the polarity should be programmed as zero     Normally Open  Going Low      This polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs  The  output will switch back to open circuit when the event has restored  Time parameters are not  applicable to this polarity     Normally Open  Pulsing Low    2 This polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to pulsing zero volts when the event  occurs  The 
71.  panel will  automatically arm itself and    LOCATION 413    on page 208 to set the auto arming pre alert  time     STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status    8 If this option has been selected  the STAY indicator will be used to display when day alarm has  been enabled  The STAY indicator will flash once every 3 seconds while day alarm is active     Refer to    LOCATION 265    on page 156 for programming zones to operate for day alarm  operation     Day alarm can be turned on and off by holding down the     button for 2 seconds  Three beeps  indicate day alarm is turned on and two beeps indicate day alarm is turned off  Refer to Day  Alarm Operation on page 157 for more information     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    220 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Consumer Options 2    LOCATION 429 2    Description    Codepad Display Extinguish After 60 Seconds    Single Button Arming Allowed  AWAY STAY Mode 1  amp  2   Single Button Disarming Allowed  STAY Mode 1  amp  2   Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm       Table 130  Consumer Options 2    Codepad Display Extinguish After 60 Seconds      If this option has been selected  all indicators on the remote codepad display will extinguish if  a button is not pressed for 60 seconds  The indicators will illuminate when there is an alarm   except a silent alarm   when a button is pressed on the codepad  when the AC mains fail  beeps  or if the entry timer has been activated     Single Button Arming Allowed  AWA
72.  report will not report again until the system has  registered another alarm condition     If the system is disarmed when an alarm occurs  only a closing report will be transmitted  when the system is next armed     Open Close Reports For STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2    If open and close reports are required when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY  Mode 2  this option will need to be selected     This option requires Open Close reports in    LOCATION 333   334    to be enabled on page 179  for it to be effective     Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete    If this option has been selected  the EDMSAT  horn speaker  bell and strobe outputs will not  activate until the base station receiver has sent a kiss off back to the control panel after the  message has been transmitted  If multiple messages are transmitted  the sirens will activate  after the last kiss off has been sent     However  the EDMSAT  horn speaker  bell and strobe outputs will activate as soon as a  codepad panic  codepad fire and codepad medical alarms have been activated     Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30   55 Seconds    The control panel after dialling the monitoring station will wait approximately 30 seconds for  receipt of a valid handshake tone  The handshake tone indicates to the control panel that it has  reached the monitoring station and can now transmit its messages  Enabling this option will  extend the wait time from 30 seconds to 55 seconds     Electronics Design and Manufacturi
73.  supply is normal or has  failed     When programming numbers  i e  Installer   s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions    the MAINS indicator will illuminate when you program numbers between 10 and 15  The  MAINS indicator represents digit 10 plus the value of the illuminated zone indicator  e g   If  you program a twelve  the MAINS indicator and zone 2 will illuminate      Indicator Definition    Flashing AC Mains Failure    Table 17  MAINS Indicator       Zone Isolating Mode    This indicator will flash once every 3 seconds when you attempt to isolate zones or program  zones to be automatically isolated for STAY Mode 2  The person will flash once every 3  seconds     Refer to Isolating Zones on page 60 for information on how to manually isolate zones  Refer to  Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 85 when using the Installer Code or Setting STAY Mode  2 Zones on page 101 when using the Master Cod to program zones to be automatically isolated  in STAY Mode 2     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Codepad Indicators    A          Flashing    49    FAULT Indicator    The FAULT indicator is used to display that the system has detected a system fault  Refer to  Fault Analysis Mode on page 63 for more information on system faults     Every time a new system fault has been detected  e g   FAULT indicator flashing   the codepad  will begin to beep once every minute     Pressing the  Away  button once will cancel the once a minute beep and acknowledge the fault   
74.  that may constitute a  nuisance to other Telecom customers     In the event of any problem with this device  the systems battery  AC mains supply and  telephone line should be disconnected  The user is to then arrange with the supplier of    the device to make the necessary repairs     Should the matter be reported to Telecom as a wiring fault and the fault be proven to be  due to this product  a call out charge will be incurred     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programming Sheets    246 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Location 000     015 Page 131  imer Telephone Number For Rca 1     Location 016   031        0 I Page 131    Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1   0  oe  o e  e  of o  olojo  o  oo  o  o     Location 032    Han shake Tone For Receiver 1 1   HI LO Handshake  Contact ID  4   No Handshake Required  d 2   1400 Hz  TX   1900 Hz  5   Pager  3   Reserved  Location 083          Page 133   Transmission Format For Receiver   1   Contact ID o gt  Basic Fager  2   4   2 Express 6   Reserved  3   FSK 300 Baud 7   Reserved  4   Domestic 8   Reserved    Location 034     039    Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1 o  o  ojo  o        Location 040     055 Page 133  Primar eor Number For Bea           Location 05620717 Page 134  Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2        a    of of o  o  o  o o  a of a  o   location072        Page 136  Handshake Tone For Receiver 2 1   HI LO Handshake  Contact ID  4   No Handshake Required  2   1400 Hz  TX  
75.  the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     2  Press button 2 followed by the  away  button to change the telco disarming sequence   Three beeps will be heard     If a previous telco disarming sequence has already been programmed  the sequence will  be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators  Refer to    Table 29   Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence    on page 80 for the  indicators and their meanings    If no telco disarming sequence has been programmed  a further two beeps will be heard    after entering this mode  These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the  call forward sequence has been displayed     3  Enter  stay 2 61  stay 2 and the  AWAY  button     Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state     semen      2   pu   2 6 1       m       How To Disable The Telco Disarming Sequence    If at any time you wish to cancel the telco disarming sequence  you may enter your     INSTALLER CODE  followed by 3 and the button  followed by 2 and the  AWAY  YJ button   then the button followed by the 4 and the button         du       Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions 83    How To Program Telco Arming Sequence   Easy Call Forward  Immediate On     1  Enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by           the  AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     2  Press button   followed by the  away  button
76.  the Solut ion 862 control panel with the factory    default values  The default values allow the control panel to communicate in the Contact ID    format     If you are not familiar to programming the Solut ion range of control panels  we    suggest that you first read information contained in the programming section beginning on    page 22     1     ISSUE130    After all wiring has been completed  connect the AC plug pack to the control panel   Both the MAINS and AWAY indicators will illuminate  The MAINS indicator will  display to indicate that the AC mains supply has been connected  The AWAY indicator  displays that the system is now armed in the AWAY Mode  If any 24 hour zones are  unsealed at the time the system is powered up  the siren  strobe and bell outputs will  activate into alarm and the corresponding zone indicator will flash     Enter the default Master Code 2 5 8    followed by the  Away  button to disarm the  system and to reset any alarm that may have occurred during the system power up  The  AWAY indicator will extinguish to indicate that the system has now been disarmed  If  any zone indicators are flashing  this would indicate that an alarm had occurred on that  zone  If a zone indicator is constantly illuminated  this would indicate that the zone is  unsealed     The back up battery should now be connected     Enter the factory default Installer Code 1 2 34 followed by the  away  button  Two  beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will now 
77.  the fault and stop any further reporting  the zone that registered the fault must be  unsealed and resealed again  Refer to  LOCATION 408   409  on page 206 to set the number  of days a zone may remain sealed before registering as a fault  Refer to Zone Options 1 on  page 167 to program zones to be monitored by the sensor watch feature     If  Self Test Failure  reports are not required  program  LOCATION 329   330  with a zero     Zone Status     Alarm Restore Code  LOCATION 331    If you wish the control panel to transmit zone alarm restore reports  this location should be  programmed as 14  If you do not wish to transmit zone restore reports  this location should be  programmed as a zero        LOCATION 332    will be ignored when programming the alarm restore code and is global for  all zones  A zone restore report will only report to the receiving party that the zone has been  allocated to  e g   Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 etc      Zone Status Reporting Options    LOCATION 332 1    Description    No Report Required    Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails    Table 83  Zone Status Reporting Options Location       This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1  You can select whether the zone  status reports will report on  receiver 1  receiver 2  both receiver 1 and receiver 2  receiver 2  only when receiver 1 fails or no reporting at all     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Reporting Information 
78.  the system in AWAY Mode or disarming the system will not be  permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected     Latching Disarm From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2    If this option has been selected  the system will only disarm from STAY Mode 1 or STAY  Mode 2 when using the latching keyswitch input  Arming the system in STAY Mode 1  STAY  Mode 2 or arming and disarming the system in AWAY Mode will not be permitted via the  keyswitch zone if this option has been selected     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    170    ISSUE130    10    12    13    14    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Momentary Arm and Disarm In AWAY Mode    If this option has been selected  the system will either arm or disarm from AWAY Mode when  using the momentary keyswitch input     Momentary Arm In AWAY Mode    If this option has been selected  the system will arm in AWAY Mode when using the  momentary keyswitch input  Disarming the system will not be permitted via the keyswitch  zone if this option has been selected     Momentary Disarm From AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2    If this option has been selected  the system will disarm from either AWAY Mode  STAY Mode  1 or STAY Mode 2 when using the momentary keyswitch input  Arming the system will not  be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected     Momentary Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1    If this option has been selected  the system will arm or disarm in STAY Mode 1 when using
79.  to change the telco arming sequence   Three beeps will be heard     If a previous call forwarding sequence has already been programmed  the sequence will  be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators  Refer to    Table 29   Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence    on page 80 for the  indicators and their meanings     If there is no call forward sequence programmed  a further two beeps will be heard after    entering this mode  These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call  forward sequence has been displayed     3  Enter  stay 1 2 1 followed by the you wish the control panel to divert all    calls to followed by  sv   and the button  Two beeps will be heard and the  system will return to the disarmed state     gc  RSTALERCODE   3            1    aww     21  GSES   ED   a       Example  If you wish to automatically divert all incoming calls to another telephone number  e g   9672  1777  when the system is armed in AWAY Mode  follow the example sequence below and  replace the telephone number mentioned in the manual with the telephone number that you  wish to divert all calls to     F 1234 3     1               How To Disable The Telco Arming Sequence    If at any time you wish to cancel the telco arming sequence  you may enter your     INSTALLER CODE  followed by 3 and the button  followed by 1 and the  AWAY      button   then the  stay  button followed by the 4 and the button             RSMERCODE   3 fm   1    
80.  to the disarmed state     Failing to exit Installer   s Programming Mode before removing the programming key  may result in corrupting the data in the programming key     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programming    33    Command 960   Exit Installer s Programming Mode    This command is used to exit the Installer s Programming Mode after you complete  programming the control panel     You may exit Installer   s Programming Mode from any location by entering command    9 6 0 followed by the   button  Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the  disarmed state  When using the remote codepad to program the system  you will notice that  the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish to indicate that you have terminated Installer   s  Programming Mode     Command 961  Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default  Settings    This command will reset the control panel back to the factory default values  Refer to the  default values shown throughout this manual or the programming sheets on pages 245 for more  information     You may reset the control panel back to the factory default settings from any location when in  Installer   s Programming Mode  This is achieved by entering command 9 6 1 followed by    the   button  Two beeps will be heard and the system will default back to the factory default  values     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    34    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Command 962   Copy Contro
81.  used     00    01    02    03    04    05    06    07    EDMSAT   Satellite Siren  Output 1 Only    This output controls all functions of an EDMSAT satellite siren  SS914   The  option of speaker indication beeps will not operate via the EDMSAT for remote  operations  No polarity is required to be programmed for this output event type     System Armed  This output will operate when the system is armed in AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1  or STAY Mode 2  The output will reset when the system has been disarmed     System Disarmed  This output will operate when the system is in the disarmed state  The output will  reset as soon as the system becomes armed     Armed In STAY Mode  This output will operate when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or  STAY Mode 2  The output will reset when the system is disarmed     Armed In AWAY Mode  This output will operate when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode  The  output will reset when the system is disarmed     Auto Arm Pre Arming Alert Time   This output will operate during the time period before the control panel will  automatically arm in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1  Once the control panel has  automatically armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1  the output will reset  To  program the pre arming alert time  refer to  LOCATION 413  on page 208     Exit Warning With All Zones Sealed Or Entry Warning   This output will operate during exit time when the control panel has been armed in  AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 if all zones are sealed
82.  wired in series with the EOL resistor and where normally open contacts are to be wired in  parallel with the EOL resistor  The function of the zones and their response times are programmable via  the system programming options  If split EOL has been programmed  this will enable 24 hour zones or  keyswitch zones to be connected in parallel to zones one and two to act as zones five and six    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Terminals and Descriptions    231    Glossary Of Terms    Alarm Condition    Answering Machine  Bypass    Armed   System ON     Automatic Arming    Automatic Disarming    AWAY or    AWAY Mode    Codepad    Day Alarm    Detectors    Dialler    Disarmed    Dual Reporting    Dynamic Battery  Testing    EDMSAT   Satellite Siren     Entry Time or  Entry Delay    Entry Warning    Is when your alarm system is armed and one of the detection devices are violated  A 24 hour zone   e g   Smoke detector  may trigger when your system is armed or disarmed     Answering machine bypass has been incorporated so that it is possible to make a connection with  the control panel for remote arming or remote programming operations when there is an answering  machine or facsimile machine on the same telephone line    When the system is in a state ready to accept alarms    Automatic arming allows the system to automatically arm at the same time each day in AWAY    Mode or STAY Mode 1     Automatic disarming allows the system to automatically disarm at the same t
83. 0000000000000    Telco Arming     Call Forward No Answer Off  To turn Call Forward No Answer Off     2615    If you wish to the Telco Arming     Call Forward No Answer upon arming the system from  AWAY Mode  you would program the following     2216 1 22000000000000    Call Back Telephone Number    LOCATION 159   174    0000000000000000    This location contains the telephone number that will be called when Upload Download is    requested or the number 6 button is held down to initiate a modem call from the control panel  to establish a communications link with the remote computer  The computer must be running  the Alarm Link Software  CC816  and will need to be set to  Waiting For An Incoming Call    The Call Back Telephone Number is also required to be programmed if Remote Connect With  Call Back Verification on page 115 is required     Refer to the section   Alarm Link Operations beginning on page 113 for more information     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    140    Solution 862 Installation Manual    LOCATION 175    ISSUE130    8    This location sets the number of rings before the control panel will answer an incoming call   This should be set at an acceptable level bearing in mind that one ring    Ring  Ring   Ring   Ring  and that a ring count of 10 represents approximately 60 seconds  This location only has  an effect if remote arming and or remote Upload Download via Alarm Link Software has been  enabled  If this location is programmed as  z
84. 1 219  STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status 219  Consumer Options 2 220  Codepad Display Extinguish After 60 Seconds 220  Single Button Arming Allowed  AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1  amp  2  220  Single Button Disarming Allowed  STAY Mode 1  amp  2  220  Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm 220  Consumer Options 3 221  Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps 221   Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9 221  Alarms Activate Sirens  amp  Strobe Ouputs In STAY Mode 1  amp  2 221  Reserved 221  Radio Input Options 222  Radio Receiver  WE800  222  Latching Keyswitch Input 222  Momentary Keyswitch Input 222  Optional Equipment 223  Optional Equipment 224  Terminals and Descriptions 229  Terminal Definitions and Descriptions 230  Glossary Of Terms 231  Solution 862 Wiring Diagram 234  Solution 862 Component Overlay 235  Telecom Connection Diagrams 236    Appendices       Appendix A    Telephone Anti Jamming    237    238  238       Appendix B  Test Reports Only When Armed    Specifications    239  239          Warranty Statement  Year 2000 Compliance    Specifications  Software Version Number    241  242    242    243  243       Advice To Users    243       New Zealand Telepermit Notes    244       Programming Sheets       Index       245  255    Introduction       This section includes the following         Introduction     Features      Quick Start    Zone Defaults      Zone Types    16    Introduction    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Congratulations on selecting the Solut io
85. 179    Open Close Reports    LOCATION 333   334    Location Description    Opening Report  Closing Report    Table 84  Open Close Reporting Locations       An  Opening  report  Contact ID Event Code 401  will be transmitted to the base station  receiver when the system has been disarmed from AWAY Mode  A  Closing  report  Contact  ID Event Code 401  is transmitted at the end of exit time when the system has been armed in  AWAY Mode     If an expanded format has been selected  this code will be used as the expansion code and the  user number that armed or disarmed the system will follow in the same transmission     Refer to Option 2 in  LOCATION 178  on page 146 for programming  Open Close  reports in  STAY Mode  To program  Open Close  reports only after a previous alarm  refer to Option 1  in  LOCATION 178  on page 146       If you do not require  Open Close  reports  program  LOCATION 333   334  with zero          Open Close Reporting Options    LOCATION 335 1    Description    No Report Required    Receiver   and Receiver 2  Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails    Table 85  Open Close Reporting Options Location       This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1  You can select whether the  open close reports will report on receiver 1  receiver 2  both receiver 1 and receiver 2  receiver  2 only when receiver 1 fails or no reporting at all     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    180 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Codepad Dures
86. 34    963   Copy From Programming Key To Panel          35  964   Erase Programming                                          36  965   Set Up Domestic Dialling                                37  966   Automatic Stepping Of Locations                     38  999   Display Panel Type Software Version Number                                           M 40  ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Internal Crystal To Keep                                              218  Introd  ction z    a ete EE RE IRURE 16  Invalid Code    ee ete 185  206  216  Isolate In STAY Mode 1                          see 171  Isolating Allowed                          eene 171  Isolating              etes 60             9 150                     62  Standard Method                       sese 61  K  Keyswitch Zone                 seen 164  Options  ierat rene diamine 169  L  Latching Outputs  Resettmng      conie detegere eS 109  Lockout Dialler                              167  232  Lockout Siren                    sese 167  232  Low Battery  eene dpt 64                                 dene teet  184  Restore Report    eee ed 184  M  MAINS Indicator                                45  48  Master  Code aate eet bett          232  Master Code Function  Changing  amp  Deleting Remote Radio Codes               92  Changing  amp  Deleting User Codes                               90  Changing Domestic Telephone Numbers                   94  Event Memory Recall                           eese 106  Setting
87. 6   Enable Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations 38  Command 999   Display Panel Type Or Software Version Number 40  Disable Factory Default 41  Defaulting The Control Panel 42  Codepad Indicators 43  CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad 44  Zone Indicators 44  AW AY Indicator 44  STAY Indicator 45  MAINS Indicator 45  FAULT Indicator 45  Audible Indicators 46  CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad 47  Zone Indicators 47  AW AY Indicator 47  STAY Indicator 48  System Disarmed 48  MAINS Indicator 48  Zone Isolating Mode 48  FAULT Indicator 49  Programming Mode 49  Off Indicator Zone Sealed 49  On Indicator Zone In Alarm 49  Audible Indicators 50  System Operations 51  System Operations 52  Arming The System In AWAY Mode 92  Forced Arming 52  Disarming The System From AWAY Mode 53       Remote Radio Transmitter Operations    System Functions    Arming The System In STAY Mode 1       Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode       Forced Arming       Disarming The System From STAY Mode 1       Arming The System In STAY Mode 2       Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode       Forced Arming       Disarming The System From STAY Mode 2          Codepad Duress Alarm  Codepad Panic Alarm       Codepad Fire Alarm       Codepad Medical Alarm       Isolating Zones  Standard Isolating       Code To Isolate       Fault Analysis Mode    Fault Descriptions          Low Battery  Date and Time       Sensor Watch       Horn Speaker Monitor       Telephone Line Fault           Fault       Fuse Fail       Communication Failure    
88. 8 MAINS  No Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator        ft                 Table 36  Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    94 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Changing Domestic Phone Numbers    2 When the system has been set up for domestic dialling  this function allows the Master Code  holder to view and program the required telephone numbers that the system will call in the  event of an alarm  For a more detailed description  refer to Domestic Dialling on page 119 for  further information     How To Change Domestic Phone Numbers    1  Enter your  MASTER cope  followed by 2 and the  AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     If there are telephone numbers already programmed  they will be displayed one digit at  a time via the remote codepad indicators  Refer to  Table 38  Codepad Indicators When  Changing Domestic Telephone Numbers  on page 95 for the indicators and their  meanings     If there are no telephone numbers programmed  a further two beeps will be heard after  entering this mode  These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last  phone number has been displayed     2  Enter all the digits for  PHONE No 1  one digit at a time  You will notice as each digit is    entered  the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate     3  If there is more than one t
89. 960 followed by the   button   Two beeps will be heard  The STAY and AWAY indicators will cease to flash and the  system will return to the disarmed state     The control panel has now been successfully defaulted back to the factory default  settings     How To Default The Control Panel Via Default Buffon    1  Disconnect the AC mains supply        the backup battery from the control panel     2  Hold down and continue to hold down the DEFAULT button   The default button is located at the top of the PCB next to the PROGRAMMING KEY  connecting socket     3  Reconnect the AC mains supply to the control panel   4  After reconnecting the AC mains supply  wait for 3 5 seconds before releasing the  DEFAULT button     5  Disarm the system using the default Master Code  e g   Enter 2580 followed by  the   button      The control panel has now been successfully defaulted back to the factory default  settings     If you hear the dialler seize relay  RL2  click four times while attempting to default the  control panel  this would indicate that the feature of defaulting the control panel has  been disabled in    LOCATION 900    on page 41  The control panel will need to be returned  to Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited for exchange where a service fee  will be charged to unlock the conirol panel s memory if the Installer Code is not known     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Codepad Indicators       This section includes the following       CP5 Eight Zon
90. ATION 422 3    Location Description    422 Increments Of 500 ms  500 ms   8 Sec   s     Table 118  Kiss Off Wait Time Location    This location sets the time that the control panel will wait for acknowledgment before  resending the report  This applies only to Contact ID Format and 4   2 Express Formats     LOCATION 423 0  Location Description    Table 119  Reserved Location    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    210 Solution 862 Installation Manual  System Time    LOCATION 901     904 0000    Location Description    Current Hour In 24 Hour Time  Tens Digit     Current Minute  Tens Digit     Current Minute  Units Digit     Current Hour In 24 Hour Time  Units Digit        Table 120  System Time Locations    The Solution 862 control panel has a real time 24 hour clock that needs to be set during  installation  This time must be set in 24 hour format HHMM  i e  10 30 PM would be  programmed as 2230   Every time the system has been powered down  the system time will  need to be reset     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Event Timers 211    System Date  LOCATION 905     910 010101    Location Description    Day Of The Month  Tens Digit     906   Day Of The Month  Units Digit   Month Of The Year  Tens Digit   908            Month Of The Year  Units Digit     Year  Tens Digit     Year  Units Digit     Table 121  System Date Locations    The Solution 862 control panel has    real time 12 month calendar that needs to be set  
91. Code 3 User Code 4 User Code 5     15 EIU  Location 210   214 Location 215   219 Location 220   224   User Code 6 User Code 7 User Code 8 Lo 15 15 15  Location 225   229 Location 230   234 Location 235   239   RadioCode9   75  15 2 Radio         10   75 Radio Code 11   73   2   Location   8 Location 4 249 EIE El 254   Radio Code 12    15 2 Radio Code 13   75 15  2 Radio Code 14   75 15       Location 255   2 Location 260   g    Radio Code 15 Radio Code 16 15 15  15  15    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    User Codes    153    User Code Priority    There are ten different priority levels that can be allocated to the user code  Each priority level  allows or restricts the functions that different user code holders may perform     Priority Level Description    e eem            cs TITIO O  ec ee HN    Arm Disarm   Master Code Functions   Code To Isolate       Arm Disarm   Master Code Functions   Code To Isolate   Open Close  Report    Meaning Description    If the user code has this option included in the priority level  the user  can arm and disarm the system  A closing report will only occur after  a previous code that has the ability to send an opening report has  disarmed the system    If the user code has this option included in the priority level  the user  can only arm the system and cannot disarm the system  A closing  report will only occur after a previous code that has the ability to send  an opening report has disarmed the system    If the user code 
92. Delay 2 zone  Contact ID Event Code 130  will have a delay time determined by the value  in Entry Timer 2 on page 204  After entry time has expired  the system will activate into alarm  condition     If a Delay 2 zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed  a zone restore report will  be automatically sent to the receiving party     Reserved    Reserved    24 Hour Medical    A 24 Hour Medical zone  Contact ID Event Code 100  is always ready to trigger the dialler   horn speaker  bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed  state  A medical report will be transmitted to the base station receiver  A 24 Hour Medical  zone will not send a restore report until the zone actually restores     24 Hour Panic    A 24 Hour Panic zone  Contact ID Event Code 120  is always ready to trigger the dialler  horn  speaker  bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state  A  panic report will be transmitted to the base station receiver  A 24 Hour Panic zone will not  send a restore report until the zone actually restores     24 Hour Hold Up    A 24 Hour Hold Up zone  Contact ID Event Code 122  is always ready to trigger the dialler   horn speaker  bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed  state  If you require the hold up alarm to be silent  enable Option 4     Silent Alarm in Zone  Options   on page 167  A 24 Hour Hold Up zone will not send a restore report until the zone  actual
93. Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions            Example    EF    85    Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones    This function allows the installer to select which zones are to be automatically isolated when  the system is armed in STAY Mode 2     Every time the system is armed in STAY Mode 2  the zones selected using this function will be  automatically isolated     To arm the system in STAY Mode 2  hold down the O button until two beeps are heard   Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 107 or Arming The System In STAY Mode 2 on page  57 for more information     How To Set STAY Mode 2 Zones    1     Enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by     and the AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will begin to flash       Enter the  ZONE NUMBER  that you wish to automatically isolate followed by the  stay     button  The corresponding ZONE indicator will begin to flash to display that you have  selected the zone to be automatically isolated every time you arm the system in STAY  Mode 2     If more than one zone is required to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2  repeat  step 2 until all zones required have been selected     Press the button to exit this function    Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state  The zones  that were selected to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 along with the STAY  indicator will extinguish      RSTALER CODE   4                                          Star    fei              As e
94. Dialler Reporting  Functions in  LOCATION 177  on page 145 has been enabled     Dialler Active  This output will operate when the communication dialler is on line  The output will  reset when the communication dialler has released the telephone line     Ring Detect   This output will operate when an incoming call has been detected by the control  panel  The output will reset when the ringing has stopped or when the call has been  answered     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    198    ISSUE130    35  36  37  38    45    46    47    49    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Mimic Zone 1 3 9 Mimic Zone 5    Mimic Zone 2 3 Mimic Zone 6  Mimic Zone 3 3 Mimic Zone 7  Mimic Zone 4 3 Mimic Zone 8    These output types will mimic the zone inputs  The output will operate when the  zone is unsealed and will reset when the zone is sealed  They will operate regardless  of the zone type chosen  i e  A zone  Not Used  can still operate a mimic output    This feature operates when the system is armed or disarmed     Global Chime   This output will operate when any zones programmed as  Chime  have triggered   The output will reset when the zone has resealed  Refer to Zone Types on page 162  for more information     Zone Not Sealed  This output will operate whenever a burglary zone is unsealed  Chime zones will  not operate this output event type     Zone Not Sealed After Exit Time   This output will operate at the end of exit time if a burglary zone is unsealed  The 
95. Domestic  Phone Numbers on page 94 when using the Master Code function     Secondary Telephone Number for Receiver 2    LOCATION 056   071    ISSUE130    0000000000000000    Refer to the Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 on page 134 for more information     When Receiver 2 has been set up for domestic reporting  telephone numbers  programmed into these locations will be ignored  Refer to Changing Domestic Phone  Numbers on page 78 when using the Installer Code function and Changing Domestic  Phone Numbers on page 94 when using the Master Code function     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Dialler Information 135    Handshake Tone For Receiver    LOCATION 072 1    This location sets the type of handshake tone required for Receiver 2 before data transmissions  to the monitoring station will begin     1  HI LO Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate in  Contact ID Format or High Speed DTMF     2  1400 Hz Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate  in Ademco Lo Speed Format or Domestic Dialling Format     3  Reserved   4  No Handshake Tone is not recommended   5  Pager Handshake Tone is required when the control panel needs to communicate in    Basic Pager Format     Option Handshake Tone Option Handshake Tone    HI LO Handshake   Contact ID Format  No Handshake    acm  1400 Hz Lo Speed    Table 56  Handshake Tones For Receiver 2       Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130
96. Exit Timers  There are two locations to be programmed for Entry Timer 1  Entry Timer 2  Exit Time For    AWAY Mode and Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode     The first location of the timer is for programming increments of 1 second  The second location  of the timer is for programming increments of 16 seconds  By adding these two locations  together will give the total time required     Example If you require the entry time to expire after 18 seconds  you would need to program     LOCATION 398    as 2  i e  2 x 1 second   2 seconds  and  LOCATION 399    as 1  i e  1 x 16  seconds   16 seconds   This would give you the total time of 18 seconds  i e  2   16 seconds    18 seconds     Entry Timer 1    LOCATION 398   399  Defaulted To 20 Seconds  41    Location Description       Increments Of 1 Second  0     15 Sec   s     Increments Of 16 Seconds  0     240 Sec   s     Table 106  Entry Timer 1 Locations    Entry time can be programmed between 0 and 255 seconds in increments of one second  Entry  Timer 1 is the delay time used by the zone type     Delay 1  Refer to Zone Types on page 162  for more information     Entry Timer 2    LOCATION 400   401  Defaulted To 40 Seconds  8 2    Location Description    Increments Of 1 Second  0   15 Sec   s        Increments Of 16 Seconds  0    240 Sec   s     Table 107  Entry Timer 2 Locations    Entry time can be programmed between 0 and 255 seconds in increments of one second  Entry  Timer 2 is the delay time used by the zone type     Delay 2  Re
97. Hand Held Transmitters   304 Mhz                          224  Night Arm Station    225    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Index    Phone Controller                           sese 225  Programming Key                     sese 225  PS100 Power Supply Module                                   226  Radio Key Keyswitch Interface                                227  Solution Codepad Mimic Board                               226  TFO0068 Plug Pack            neenon 226  Output                    ee beseg e erm terree 190  Output 2    s pendere eI Peu 190  Output Event Type                  esee 192  AC Bails ve io Ft vel Spat eesti SERRE 194  AC Mains 60 Hz      50   2                                        198  Alarm When In AWAY                                            196  Alarm When In STAY                                            195  Armed In AWAY Mode                    eene 192  Armed In STAY Mode                       seen 192  Auto Arm Pre Alert Time                     sees 192  Codepad Duress Alarm                        eee 195  Codepad Fire   1                        eee 195  Codepad Medical Alarm                                           194  Codepad Panic Alarm                          eese 195  Codepad Tamper                      seen 195  Communications Failure                        eese 197  Communications Failure After 3 Unsuccessful Calls  Wandel LSE aL editi cts uie erecti cet    ceti 197  Day Alarm Enabled                             se
98. Multiplier  When To Operate Is selected from the output event types listed on page 192     Each digit should be entered into the two corresponding  locations for the output event type required     How To Operate Is selected from  Table 101  Event Type Polarities    on page  199  This determines whether the output remains operating for  the duration of the event  pulses for the duration  operates once  only  one shot  or latches on     How Long To Operate For Is determined by a time base and a multiplier  Refer to   Timing Of Outputs  on page 201 for further information     How Often To Operate For 15 determined by a time base and a multiplier  Refer to   Timing Of Outputs  on page 201 for further information     Output Defaults  Location 368   373 Location 374   379 Location 380   385  o  refe jo  t      9      Default For Horn Default For Default For Strobe  Speaker Fire Alarm Verification  Reset In 8 Hrs   Location 386     391 Location 392     397  mer                  Cod                  Default For Default For Entry Exit  Sirens Running Warning   Day Alarm    LI Ll LL     Event Type Polarity Time Base Time Multiplier    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programmable Outputs    Example    191    Redirecting Outputs To The Codepad Buzzer    Multiple output event types can be directed to the codepad buzzer so that it may be used to  indicate any number of events     This is achieved by selecting an output and programming it for the required output event ty
99. Select the required dialler option from the table below          Description    No Keport Required      Receiver   and Receiver 2         Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails    Table 77  Zone Dialler Options       Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Zone Information 173    Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren    LOCATION 323 3    Location Description       323 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren  0 15     Table 78  Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren Location    This location determines the number of times the sirens can be triggered before any lockout  options will take effect  A minimum of one zone must be programmed for lockout siren for  this location to be effective  Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 167 to program zones for  lockout siren     Only alarms triggered from zone inputs will increment the swinger shutdown counter  This  means alarms such as codepad panic  access denied and any other system alarms will not effect  the swinger shutdown count     While the sirens are operating  the counter for the sirens is only incremented by the first zone  that causes the alarm  Any other zones that are triggered during siren run time will not effect  the counter  While the dialler is on line  its counter is only incremented by the first zone that  causes the alarm  Any other zones that are triggered while the dialler is on line will not effect  the counter     When the swinger shutdown count  As programmed in    LOCATION 323     has been reached   all zones that have b
100. System Armed In AWAY Mode  System Armed In STAY Mode 1  Beep    Table 125  Horn Speaker Beeps For Remote Operations       Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    216 Solution 862 Installation Manual    System Options 2    LOCATION 425 0    Description    Codepad Panic To Be Silent    Codepad Fire To Be Silent  Codepad Medical To Be Silent  Access Denied  Code Retries  To Be Silent       Table 126  System Options 2    Codepad Panic To Be Silent      If this option has been selected  a codepad panic alarm or radio remote panic alarm will not  operate the horn speaker  the bell or the strobe outputs  If this option is not selected  all three    outputs will operate after a codepad panic alarm has been activated when the 1 and 3    buttons or the LSTAY  and  away  buttons on the remote codepad are pressed simultaneously   Selecting this option does not effect the operation of the communication dialler     If you wish to disable the reporting of the codepad panic alarm  program    LOCATION 337    338    on page 180 as zero     Codepad Fire To Be Silent    2 If this option has been selected  a codepad fire alarm will not operate the horn speaker  the bell  or the strobe outputs  If this option is not selected  all three outputs will operate after a    codepad fire alarm has been activated when the 4 and 6 buttons on the remote codepad are  pressed simultaneously  Selecting this option does not effect the operation of the  communication dialler     If you wish t
101. TAY Mode 1                                12  Panic  Alarm  oer a 72  Turning Remote Output 1 Off oe 73  Turning Remote Output 1 On    eee 73  Turning Remote Output 2 Off oer 73  Turning Remote Output 2 On                      sss 73  A  AC Mains       In  1                                                  217  Ignore Fail Indication                                eeesee 217  Reporter eR Uo piede 183  Restore  Report   etie bet cs 183  ACG Mains Falret etre e ERR 66  Access Codes  Installer Code              ene ent 150  User Code Priority Level                                esses 153  User Codes  ette eO tete bert 151  Access Denied  Code Retrie  oe ete e RU End 185  Access Denied To Be   1                                              216  Adding User Codes                       esee 100  Alarm Condition                          eese 231  Alarm Tank    eere 117  148  Direct ConnB  ct  iier rE 116  Enable Alarm Link Call                                   117  148  Enable Upload Download                                117  148  External Modem Module                                sss 117  Initiate Modem Call                             eese 109  Remote Connect sicoiir 114  Remote Connect With Call Back Verification         115  Remote Connect With Customer Control                 114  Remote Connect Without Call Back Verification    115  Terminate Session If Report Pending               117  148  Alarm Link Software                  eese 225  Alarm Memory Reset On            
102. The Solution 862 control panel has the ability to be remotely operated using hand held  radio remote transmitters  There is a choice of using either a 2 channel hand held transmitter or  a 4 channel hand held transmitter to operate the system     Both the 2 channel and 4 channel hand held transmitters can remotely arm and disarm the  system in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 and activate remote panic alarms  However  the 4   channel hand held transmitter has the added ability to operate the control panels programmable  outputs allowing you to activate a garage door or outside lights etc     Before any hand held radio transmitter can operate the control panel  you will need to teach the  control panel the transmitters radio code  Refer to Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User  Codes on page 69 for more information     Indications Upon Remote Radio Transmitter Operations    When using either the 2 channel or 4 channel hand held transmitters to operate the system   audible and or visual indications can be provided via the horn speakers or the strobe  This will  allow you to operate the system from outside the premises with confidence  Only the installer  can program the feature of audible and or visual indication beeps  Refer to Option 4     Allow  Strobe Indications For Radio Arm Disarm and Option 8     Allow Horn Speaker Beeps For  Radio Arm Disarm in    LOCATION 424    on page 215 for more information     No Of Beeps System Status    System Disarmed    System Armed In AWAY Mode  Sy
103. This feature prevents the control panel from being manually defaulted via the default button or  to prevent using a programming key to perform an automatic download to the control panel  when the system is disarmed     A zero programmed into this location will allow defaulting of the control panel  If 15 has been  programmed into this location  defaulting of the control panel will not be permitted and the  Installer Code MUST be used for further programming of the control panel     If the Installer Code is not known  the control panel will need to be returned to your EDM  Distributor for exchange  A nominal fee applies for this service     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited does not recommend the use of this  feature     If the option is required to disable the option of being able to default the control panel  a  special procedure has been implemented to eliminate the possibility of accidentally setting this  option  The default button on the PCB must be held down while programming this location     How To Prevent Manual Defaulfing Of The Control Panel    1  Enter Installer   s Programming Mode  i e  1 2 3 4 followed by the   button    Two beeps will be heard and the data currently programmed in    LOCATION 000    will  be displayed via the hand held programmer or remote codepad     If you are using a remote codepad  the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash to  indicate that Installer   s Programming Mode has been accessed     2  From the hand held prog
104. UE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    To exit the Installer s Programming Mode  enter command 9 60 followed by the    button  Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state  Refer to  Installer s Programming Commands on page 29 for further information on commands that can  be performed during access of the Installer s Programming Mode     When using the hand held programmer  any reference in this manual made to the  stay     button should be considered as the   button and the  away  button considered as the    button     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programming    27    Programming With The Programming Key    The Programming Key  CC891  is a unique device that will allow you to store or copy  programming information from your control panel  Once the programming key has  information stored in the microprocessor  the programming key may be used to easily program  other existing Solution 862 control panels with the same programming data  or be  alternatively used for back up purposes of existing information     Connecting a programming key  which has been pre programmed directly onto the control  panel in the disarmed state  will automatically initiate a data transfer from the programming  key to the control panel memory     If you have a new programming key  you should first enter the Installer s Programming Mode  and program the system as required before connecting the programming key to the control  panel     To connect 
105. WAY Mode  This time must be set in 24 hour format  i e  10 30  PM would be programmed as 2230   Refer to Option 4 in    LOCATION 428    on page 219 if  you require the system to arm in STAY Mode 1     If forced arming has been disabled for any zone  the feature of automatic arming will operate  regardless of any zones being unsealed  Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 171 for more    information on programming zones for forced arming     User code 16 will report when the feature of automatic arming is used     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Event Timers 209    Auto Disarming Time    LOCATION 418   421 0000    Location Description    Actual Hour Of The Day  Tens Digit     Actual Hour Of The Day  Units Digit   Actual Minute Of The Day  Tens Digit   421 Actual Minute Of The Day  Units Digit           Table 117  Auto Disarming Time Locations    These locations are used to program the actual time of the day that the system will  automatically disarm itself from AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2  This time  must be set in 24 hour format  i e  10 30 PM would be programmed as 2230      User code 16 will report when the feature of automatic arming is used           V1 00   V1 07  The system failed to automatically disarm if the system was not     programmed to automatically arm  To solve the problem  we suggest that     you program the automatic arming time as 25 00 hours if you only require  the control panel to disarm     Kiss Off Wait Time  LOC
106. Y Mode STAY Mode 1  amp  2     2 If this option has been selected  the hold down functions for arming in AWAY Mode  STAY  Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 will be functional  Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 107 for  more information     Single Button Disarming Allowed  STAY Mode 1  amp  2     4 This option will only operate when Option 2 in this location has also been selected  This  option will allow hold down functions for disarming from STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2   Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 107 for more information     Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm    8 This option allows the memory of alarm events to be cleared from the remote codepad when  the system has been disarmed  If this option has not been selected  the system will need to be  armed and disarmed again to clear alarm memory from the remote codepad     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System and Consumer Options 221    Consumer Options    LOCATION 430 5    Description    Codepad Fault Beeps Allowed    Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9    Alarms Activate Sirens and Strobe Outputs In STAY Mode 1  amp  2    8 Reserved       Table 131  Consumer Options 3    Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps  1 If this option has been enabled  the codepad will flash the FAULT indicator and beep once    fault and stop the codepad from beeping once every minute  simply press the button   If this option has not been enabled  the codepad will only flash the FAULT indicator when a    new fault has occ
107. ach zone has been selected to be isolated  the corresponding ZONE indicator will  begin to flash  If a mistake has been made  press the zone number that was    incorrectly entered followed by the  stay  button  This zone is now no longer  programmed to be isolated and the ZONE indicator will extinguish     If you wish to select zones 2  5 and 6 to be automatically isolated when arming in STAY Mode  2  follow the sequence below     iiis    4             Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    86    ISSUE130            Solution 862 Installation Manual    How To Disable STAY Mode 2 Zones  If at any time you wish to disable all zones selected to be automatically isolated for STAY    Mode 2  you may enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by 4 and the AWAY button  followed    by the AWAY  button      RSTALER CODE          i                        Satellite Siren Service Mode    If an EDMSAT is connected to Output 1  this function will allow you to perform service work  on the system without triggering the satellite siren  The satellite siren will return to its normal  working state the next time the system is armed     How To Enter Satellite Siren Service Mode    1  Enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by 5 and the AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard      RSTAERCODE  5   p        Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions    87    Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On Off    Telephone monitor mode allows the remote codepad to be used fo
108. al    Normally Open  One Shot Low With Alarm    This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event  occurs  The output will switch back to open circuit once the one shot time has expired  when  the event has returned to normal or when the system has been disarmed     This polarity is ideally suited for the operation of strobe lights as they can be programmed  Up  to 99 hours  to reset and prevent them from burning out or becoming annoying to others from  prolonged operation     Normally Open  Latching Low  This polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs  The    output will switch back to open circuit once the 7 button on the remote codepad is held down  until two beeps are heard  Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity     Normally Low  Going Open    This polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs  The  output will switch back to zero volts when the event has restored  Time parameters are not  applicable to this polarity     Normally Low  Pulsing Open    This polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to pulsing open circuit when the event  occurs  The output will switch back to zero volts when the event has restored  Time  parameters vary the  Off  time of the pulse     Normally Low  One Shot Open    This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event  occurs  The output will switch back to z
109. am       ucc        Refer To Digit 0                CI SEN    32   4    9  J rolwdBy2      6   6   Brek _    Fottowe By 4      Table 38  Telco Arm Disarm Dialling Digits       Lone 2 Lone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 MAINS  Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator       Table 39  Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions 97    How To Program Telco Arming Sequence   Easy Call Forward  No Answer On     1  Enter your followed by           the AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     2  Press button 1 followed by the  away  button to change the telco arming sequence   Three beeps will be heard     If a previous telco disarming sequence has already been programmed  the sequence will  be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators  Refer to    Table 39   Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence    on page 96 for the  indicators and their meanings    If there is no call forward sequence programmed  a further two beeps will be heard after    entering this mode  These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call  forward sequence has been displayed     3  Enter  stay  6 1 followed by the you wish the control panel to divert all    calls to followed by  sv   and the button  Two beeps will be heard and the  system will return to the disarmed sta
110. and Off    Holding the     button down will turn day alarm on or off  If the STAY indicator is required to  indicate the status of day alarm operation  enabled disabled   refer to Option 8 in  LOCATION  428  on page 219 for further information  The STAY indicator when enabled  will flash once  every 3 seconds to display when day alarm is active     How To Turn Day Alarm ON    1  Hold down the 4 button until three beeps are heard   Day alarm has now been turned on     How To Turn Day Alarm OFF    1  Hold down the 4 button until two beeps are heard   Day alarm has now been turned off     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions    109    Fault Analysis Mode    There are various system faults that can be detected by the control panel  When any of these  faults are present  the FAULT indicator will begin to flash and the codepad will beep once every  minute  Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 64 for a more detailed description on each fault    type     How To Determine The Type Of Fault    1  Hold the 5 button down until two beeps are heard   The STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash in unison with the FAULT indicator   One or more ZONE indicators  1 8  will illuminate to indicate the type of fault that has  occurred     How To Exit Fault Analysis Mode    1  To exit fault analysis mode  press the button   The STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish and return you to the disarmed state     AWAY    Zone Indicator Fault Description  Low Battery  
111. and the sensor watch time is programmed for 1  day  a zone that is programmed for sensor watch will register a sensor watch fault if not    triggered during the disarmed state within 3 days     This feature would be useful in a situation where someone has moved objects in the view of the  detector  blocking out the detector from picking up movement     Codepad Lockout Time    LOCATION 410 0    Location Description       410 Increments Of 1 Minute  0   15 Minutes     Table 112  Codepad Lockout Time Locations    All codepads will be locked out for the specified time programmed if an invalid code has been  entered more times than allowed by the code retry attempts programmed in  LOCATION 356   on page 185  If the Codepad Lockout Time is programmed as zero  no codepad lockout will  occur     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Event Timers 207    Siren Run Time    LOCATION 411  Defaulted To 5 Minutes  5    Location Description    411 Increments Of 1 Minute  0     15     Table 113  Siren Run Time Location    The siren run time determines how long the horn speaker will activate during an alarm  condition  The siren run time can be programmed between 0   15 minutes      1 minute      Siren Sovnd Rate    LOCATION 412 7    Location Description    412 Siren Sound Rate  0   SLOWEST 15   FASTEST     Table 114  Siren Sound Rate Location       The siren sound rate varies the frequency of the siren tone  Programming the siren sound rate  as a zero is the slow
112. anel will now answer on the first ring  If you do  not wait the 8 seconds  the control panel will not answer the call  Refer to Option 2 in   LOCATION 177  on page 145 if you wish to enable Answering Machine Bypass Only  When System Is Armed     You should set the ring count on the answering machine or facsimile machine to be  higher than two rings  Four or six rings would be preferred     Programming a zero into this location will disable the control panel from answering an  incoming call     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Dialler Information 141    Telephone Line Fault Options    LOCATION 176 0    When programming this location  you will notice that there are four options per location  If  you require options 1  2  4 or all of these options  only one number needs to be programmed   This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together  Program a 7 if you  require options 1  2 and 4 simultaneously  i e  1  2 4 7      Description    Display FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails    Sound Alarm When System Is Armed  Sound Alarm When System Is Disarmed       Table 61  Telephone Line Fault Options    The control panel has the ability to monitor the telephone line  If the telephone line has been  cut or disconnected for more than forty seconds  the control panel will recognise this and the  FAULT indicator will illuminate on the codepad  The FAULT indicator will extinguish once the  telephone line has been restored for more than forty seconds
113. arming the system in  AWAY Mode     Indicator Definition    Off System Is Not Armed In AWAY Mode    Table 15  AWAY Indicator       Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    48          Flashing    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    STAY Indicator    The STAY indicator is used to display that the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY  Mode 2  The STAY indicator will also flash in unison with the AWAY indicator when  Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions are used     The indicator will also illuminate when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY  Mode 2     Refer to page 54 for the different methods of arming the system in STAY Mode 1  Refer to  Zone Options 1 on page 167 for information on setting zones to be automatically isolated in  STAY Mode 1  For the method of arming the system in STAY Mode 2  refer to page 57   Refer to Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 85 when using the Installer Code or Setting  STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 101 when using the Master Cod to program zones to be  automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2     Indicator Definition                1 System Is Armed In STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2    Off System Is Not Armed In STAY Mode    Flashing Zone Isolating Mode Or Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones    Table 16  STAY Indicator       System Disarmed    This indicator will illuminate with the indicator when the system has been disarmed     MAINS Indicator    The MAINS indicator is used to display that the systems AC mains
114. at by using this feature you are reducing the security of the control panel     Method One    Method one allows you to call the control panel from any remote location without the need of  having the control panel call back to the computer to establish a link  In using method one  the    customer has no access to initiate a modem call by holding down the    button  The following  locations need to be programmed for this method to operate      LOCATION 159   174  on page 139 should be programmed as zeros  Option 1 in   LOCATION 180  on page 117 148 will need to be enabled and Option 2 needs to be disabled   The control panel will now allow a connection of the first call without calling the remote  computer back to make contact     Method Two    Method two allows you to program a call back telephone number so that the customer can still  initiate a modem call when required  but when calling the control panel via the computer from  any remote location  the control panel does not call back the remote computer to establish a  link      LOCATION 159   174  on page 139 should have the call back telephone number  programmed if required  Option   in  LOCATION 180  on page 117 148 will need to be  enabled and Option 2 needs to be disabled     The control panel will now allow a connection of the first call without calling the remote  computer back to make contact but still allow the customer to initiate a modem call by holding    down the 6 button when required     Remote Connect With Ca
115. at zone  i e  Zone pulse count is only relevant when  the system has been armed      Example  An example of day alarm set up could be the front door of a shop which has a pressure mat or  electronic beam that customers activate as they enter to and from the shop  As the customers  walk on the pressure mat or break the electronic beam  the codepad buzzer will beep     Day Alarm Resetting    An output that has been programmed for day alarm resetting will operate when a zone  programmed for day alarm has been triggered  The output will reset once the zone has  resealed  This will only occur when the system is disarmed  Refer to Output Event Type Day  Alarm Resetting on page 193 for more information     Day Alarm Latching  An output that has been programmed for day alarm latching will operate when a zone  programmed for day alarm has been triggered  The ZONE indicator and the latching output    will reset when the AWAY  button has been pressed  This will only occur when the system is  disarmed  Refer to Output Event Type   Day Alarm Latching on page 193 for more  information     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Zone Information    157    Day Alarm Operation    If a zone has been programmed for day alarm  the zone can be isolated in the normal way so  that it does not register as a day alarm zone during the disarmed state  Only zones 1     4 can be  used as day alarm zones     The STAY indicator can be programmed to indicate whether day alarm has been t
116. atically dial the  telecommunication exchange to redirect all calls to your mobile phone  pocket pager or    answering service  When activated  your telephone will still allow outgoing calls to be made     Contact your telecommunications provider for more information on call forward operations     Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program       Refer To Digit 0                  eae UR           0    32   4    9  J rolwdBy2      6   6   Brek _    Fottowe By 4      Table 28  Telco Arm Disarm Dialling Digits       Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 MAINS  Digit Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator       Table 29  Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions 81    How To Program Telco Arming Sequence   Easy Call Forward  No Answer On     1  Enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by           the  AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     2  Press button   followed by the  away  button to change the telco arming sequence   Three beeps will be heard     If a previous call forwarding sequence has already been programmed  the sequence will  be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators  Refer to    Table 29   Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence    on page 80 for the  indicators and their meanings    
117. cation 900  Disable Factory Default    0   Defaulting Enabled  15   Defaulting Disabled    Location 901     904  System Time    Location 901  Location 902  Location 903  Location 904    Hour Of The Day  Tens Digit   Hour Of The Day  Units Digit   Minute Of The Day  Tens Digit   Minute Of The Day  Units Digit     Location 905     910  System Date    Location 905  Location 906  Location 907  Location 908  Location 909  Location 910    Day Of The Month  Tens Digit   Day Of The Month  Units Digit   Month Of The Year  Tens Digit   Month Of The Year  Units Digit   Year  Tens Digit   Year  Units Digit     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    ISSUE130    254 Solution 862 Installation Manual    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Index    256    2  2 Channel Hand Held Transmitter Operations  Arming In AWAY Mode                       71  Arming In STAY Mode 1                        ese 71  Disarming From AWAY                                          71  Disarming From STAY Mode 1                                71  Panic Alarin      5  5 ete eerte rr 71  2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface                                 227  24 Hour Zone             ertet epe Eras 233  4  4   2 Reporting Format                 seseeeeee 126  4 Channel Hand Held Transmitter Operations  Arming In AWAY Mode                      eee 72  Arming In STAY Mode 1                        sees 72  Disarming From AWAY                                          72   Disarming From S
118. ceiver 1 and Receiver 2  Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails    Table 100  Test Reporting Options Location       This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1  You can select whether the test  reporting options will report on receiver 1  receiver 2  both receiver 1 and receiver 2  receiver 2  only when receiver 1 fails or no reporting at all     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    188 Solution 862 Installation Manual    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programmable Outputs       This section includes the following     Outputs    Output Defaults     Redirecting Outputs To The Codepad Buzzer    Output Event Types    Output Polarity      Timing Of Outputs    Pulsing Polarities      One Shot Polarities    190    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Outputs    ISSUE130       The Solut ion 862 control panel has four fully programmable outputs on the main PCB and  one other programmable output that operates the codepad buzzer  These four outputs are  factory default to operate as horn speaker  fire alarm verification  strobe and an internal  screamer     Outputs 1     4 will NOT operate whilst the control panel detects a low battery     Programmable outputs require four parameters to be programmed in order to operate correctly     Event Type  When To Operate  Polarity  How To Operate  Time Base  How Long To Operate For    Time Multiplier         Often To Operate    O    O LU    Event Polarity Time Time  Type Base 
119. ction   Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish      WASTER cone   5    nw      OUTPUT No     AWAY    AWAY              If Output 2 has been programmed as 2    1000 in    LOCATION 374   379     the  Master Code holder may turn on this output following the steps outlined below     2580  5    wx   1               away           Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions    103    How To Turn An Output Off From The Remote Codepad    1             Example    Enter your followed by 5 and the AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     Enter the required  ouTPUT      1 3  followed by the button     Two beeps will be heard and the output will now turn off  Repeat step 2 if more than  one output is required to be turned off     Press the button again to exit this function   Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish          5                 5   fr          Ss   wd             If Output 2 has been programmed as 2 8 1000 in    LOCATION 374   379     the  Master Code holder may turn off this output following the steps outlined below     a    2580  5   Aw           Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    104 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Setting The Date and Time    6 This function only needs to be used when the date and time requires to be changed or the  system has been powered down     If the date and time has not b
120. ctronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Dialler Reporting Formats 125    Point ID Codes    The table below shows the different Point ID Codes and Event Codes that are transmitted to  the base station receiver when using Contact ID Reporting Format  All event codes are fixed  and will always transmit the same code as there are no programming locations made available  to alter these     Point ID Event Event  Number Description Code Explanation Page     o      om      m  Medical Zone 24 Hour Medical   Leo o9   emm    peemms        eem    pee      emm               m pow eem     Du  ee    mmm          o pese C po   em    e eme       emm      o emm pow ewe        eee pom pem          pem    emm       Table 47  Point ID Codes       Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    126    Solution 862 Installation Manual    ISSUE130    4 2 Reporting Format    The 4 2 Express Format will report a Subscriber ID Number followed by an expansion code  and the reporting channel number is transmitted directly after the expansion code     Subscriber ID Number Expansion Code Channel Number  SSSS    Table 49  Example Reporting In 4 2 Format    New Event 4   2 Report Event 4   2 Report    5855        5555 R Cy  SSSS        Trouble Restore SSSS TR         Bypass Restore SSSS Br Cy    AC Fail SSSS EAc AC Fail Restore SSSS Eg Acn                                     Closing Report   sssscu                                       Pest Report  sSsno                        Program A
121. d Subscriber ID Number     Dialler 1 could be set up to report in Domestic Dialling Format and reports to Receiver 1   Dialler 2 could be set up to report to a base station receiver in Contact ID Format only when  Dialler 1 was unsuccessful     How To Program A Telephone Number    When programming the telephone number  if a  0  is required  it must be programmed as a  10    Each location in the primary  secondary and call back telephone numbers hold one digit of the  telephone number     To tell the dialler when the end of the telephone number has been reached  a  0  must be  inserted at the end of the telephone number  Therefore the dialling sequence will be terminated  when a zero appears     To program the telephone number 9672 1055 as the Primary Telephone Number for Receiver  1  you would program the following     LOCATION 000   015    9672125500000000     Programming A Four Second Pause In The Telephone Number    To enter a four second pause in the dialling sequence  you would need to program the value   13  This may be necessary when the dialler is communicating through an old  slower   telephone exchange or where a PABX system is in place     To program the telephone number 02 pause 9672 1055 as the Primary Telephone Number for  Receiver 2  you would program the following     LOCATION 040   055    451596721 75500000     Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program     6       6               H    L  x    w  g   S     3    Table 53  Dialling Digits
122. default Installer Code is 1234  Two beeps will be heard  and both the AWAY and the STAY indicators will flash simultaneously to indicate that you have  entered Installer   s Programming Mode     When entering Installer   s Programming Mode  you will be automatically positioned at     LOCATION 000     the beginning of the Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1     Data Zone   Zone2  Zone3  Zone4  Zone5 JZone6  Zone7  Zone8 MAINS  Value Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator       14 v Y  psc      0 _ ae        Table 3  Codepad Indicators When Programming    To access Installer   s Programming Mode  enter the  INSTALLER CODE  followed by the  button  Two beeps will be heard and both the AWAY and the STAY indicators will flash    simultaneously to indicate that you have entered Installer   s Programming Mode  The codepad  indicators will display the current data stored in the first location  LOCATION 000      To move to another programming location  enter the LOCATION NUMBER required followed    by the button  The data of the new location will now be displayed  e g  3 4 followed    by the button will automatically step you to the beginning of the Subscriber ID Number  for Receiver 1            To move to the next location  press the button  This will step you to the next location  and the data in that location will be displayed  e g  If you are currently positioned at       LOCATION 034     pressing the button will step you to 
123. dical to be  silent     Restore reports are not transmitted for this event  If a  Medical  report is not required   program  LOCATION 341   342  with a zero     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    182    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Codepad Reporting Options    LOCATION 343    1    Option Description    No Report Required    2 Receiver 2    Receiver   and Receiver 2    8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails    Table 90  Codepad Reporting Options Location       This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1  You can select whether the  codepad reporting options will report on receiver 1  receiver 2  both receiver 1 and receiver 2   receiver 2 only when receiver   fails or no reporting at all     System Status     Fuse Fail Report    LOCATION 344   345    System Status     Fuse Fail Restore Report    LOCATION 346   347    ISSUE130         3    Location Description    System Status     Fuse Fail Reporting Code  Tens Digit        System Status     Fuse Fail Reporting Code  Units Digit     Table 91  System Status     Fuse Fail Report Locations    A system trouble report  Contact ID Event Code 300  will be transmitted when either the  codepad fuse or the accessories fuse has blown  A delay of approximately 10 seconds will be  between from when the fuse has blown and when the system will report the event             8    Location Description    System Status     Fuse Fail Restore Reporting Code  Units Digit        System Status     Fus
124. down the    button until two beeps are heard   Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 107 or Arming The System In STAY Mode 2 on page  57 for more information     How To Set STAY Mode 2 Zones    1  Enter your followed by     and the AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will begin to flash     2    Enter the  ZONE NUMBER   hat you wish to automatically isolate followed by the  stay   button  The corresponding ZONE indicator will begin to flash to display that you have  selected the zone to be automatically isolated every time you arm the system in STAY  Mode 2     If more than one zone is required to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2  repeat  step 2 until all zones required have been selected     3  Press the button to exit this function   Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state  The zones  that were selected to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 and the STAY indicator  will extinguish         WASTER            4                                         Star    fei             As each zone has been selected to be isolated  the corresponding ZONE indicator will  begin to flash  If a mistake has been made  press the zone number that was    incorrectly entered followed by the  stay  button  This zone is now no longer  programmed to be isolated and the ZONE indicator will extinguish     If you wish to select zones 2  5 and 6 to be automatically isolated when arming in STAY Mode  2  follow the sequence below  Rem
125. during installation  This time must be set using the format DDMMYY  i e  If the date that is  required to be set is the 1 July 1997  you would then program 010797   Every time the system  has been powered down  the system date will need to be reset     Setting The Date and Time    The Master Code holder is allowed to set the date and time as follows     How To Set The New Date and Time    1  Enter your followed by 6 and the AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash       T 2  Enter the day  month  year  hour and minute using the  DD  MM  YY  HH  MM  format   i e  DD   Day of the month  MM   Month of the year  YY   Current year  HH   Hour  of the day  MM   Minute of the day         Please note that when programming the hour of the day  you will need to use 24 00 hour  format     3  Press the AWAY  button when finished   Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish  If a long  beeps is heard  an error was made when entering the date and time     Example  If the date and time needs to be set for the 1st January 1997 at 10 30 PM  program the date and  time as follows     a 2580  6   Au    O 1 0 1 9   2 2 3 0       Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    212 Solution 862 Installation Manual    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System and Consumer Options       This section includes the following       System Options 1      System Options 2      System Opt
126. e  battery and AC mains have been reconnected after the system has been powered down     If this option is not selected  the system will always power up armed in AWAY Mode     Arm Disarm Tracking On Power Up    If enabled  the control panel will keep its current armed status in non volatile memory  If for  any reason the control panel is restarted due to a power failure  the control panel will return to  the armed or disarmed status that the control panel was in before the power failed     If the system was disarmed prior to the system being powered down  when the system is  powered back up  the system will return to the disarmed state     Internal Crystal To Keep Time    If this option has been selected  it will force the control panel not to use the mains frequency as  a time base to keep time  The control panel will use the internal crystal  XTAL  to keep track  of time  This option is useful in countries that do not have a constant mains frequency     Keyswitch Interface  Night Arm Station Or RE005 Installed    This option must be selected when using the Radio Key Keyswitch Interface  CC813   2  Channel Radio Interface  RE005   or the Night Arm Station  CP105   This option allows the  control panel to be operated using either of these three accessories  User Code 16 will be used  when reporting open close reports via any of these accessories     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System and Consumer Options 219    Consumer Options 1    LOCATION 428 0    D
127. e 185 for setting the number of  incorrect attempts that may be allowed  This output will reset once a valid user code  has been entered     Horn Speaker  Output 1 Only    This output will operate only on Output   and should be programmed whenever an 8  ohm horn speaker is required  A maximum of two horn speakers may be used   Refer to    LOCATION 411    on page 207 for setting the siren run time and     LOCATION 412    on page 207 for setting the siren sound rate     If you require monitoring of the horn speaker  refer to Option 2 in    LOCATION  424    on page 215     Sirens Running   This output will operate for the duration of the siren run time programmed in   LOCATION 411  on page 207  When the sirens have been activated  this output  will reset once the siren run time has expired  The relay output  Output 4  is factory  default for this operation     Strobe Operating   This output will operate when an alarm condition occurs and will reset once a valid  user code has been entered  The strobe output  Output 3  is factory default for  strobe operation and is programmed to automatically reset after 8 hours     Silent Alarm   This output will operate when any zone programmed to be a silent alarm has  triggered  The output will reset when the siren run time expires  an audible alarm  has triggered  or a valid user code has been entered     Alarm When In STAY Mode   This output will operate whenever an audible or silent zone alarm has triggered  when the system has been armed
128. e AWAY  button  All available Master Code functions are listed in    Table  33  Master Code Functions    outlined below      WASTER CODE     FUNCTION       Function Description Page  0 Reserved  Changing and Deleting User Codes Radio Codes       Changing Domestic Phone Numbers  Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence  Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones   Turning Outputs On Off   Setting The Date and Time   Walk Test Mode    Event Memory Recall Mode    Reserved       Table 33  Master Code Functions    Reserved    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    90    ISSUE130           xample    a    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Changing and Deleting User Codes    This function allows a Master Code holder to add change or delete any of the system user  codes     How To Add Or Change A User Code  1  Enter your  MASTER cope  followed by 1 and the  AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     2  Enter the  USER NUMBER   1 8  that you wish to change followed by the button     Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate  Refer  to  Table 35  Codepad Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers    on page 91     3  Enter the digits required for the  NEw cone  followed by the button   Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish     If you wish to change any further user codes  repeat this procedure as many times as  required         WASTERCODE  1    a     USER NUMBER   
129. e Fail Restore Reporting Code  Tens Digit     Table 92  System Status     Fuse Fail Restore Report Locations    A system trouble restore report  Contact ID Event Code 300  will be transmitted when either  the codepad fuse or the accessories fuse has been replaced  A delay of approximately 10  seconds will be between from when the fuse has been replaced and when the system will report  the event     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Reporting Information 183    System Status     AC Fail Report    LOCATION 348   349 2    Location Description       System Status     AC Fail Reporting Code  Tens Digit     System Status     AC Fail Reporting Code  Units Digit     Table 93  System Status     AC Fail Report Locations    An  AC Loss  report  Contact ID Event Code 301  will be transmitted to the base station  receiver when the AC mains supply has been disconnected for two minutes  If you require an   AC Loss  report to be transmitted to the base station receiver when the AC mains supply has  been disconnected for 1 hour  enable Option 1 in  LOCATION 426  on page 217  If you wish  to ignore AC fail  enable Option 2 in  LOCATION 426  on page 217             If an  AC Loss  report is not required  program  LOCATION 348   349  with a zero     System Status     AC Fail Restore Report    LOCATION 350   351 7       Location Description    System Status     AC Fail Restore Reporting Code  Tens Digit     System Status     AC Fail Restore Reporting Code  Units Digit    
130. e LED Codepad     CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad    44 Solution 862 Installation Manual    CPS tight Zone LED Codepad    Solution    The codepad is the communications interface between you and your alarm    system  The codepad allows you to issue commands and offers both visual    and audible indications that guide you through the general operation     The codepad incorporates numerous indicators  There are ZONE indicators  that are used to show the condition of each zone and four others for general  STAY MAINS FAULT AWAY   status  The following is a list of situations and the relevant indications that  will be seen           Figure 1  CP5 Eight Zone Codepad  CP508     Zone Indicators    The ZONE indicators are used to display the status of the zones  The following table lists the  various circumstances that the indicators will display  i e  Zone Sealed  Zone Unsealed      Indicator Definition     0 25               Zone Is In Alarm Condition  Flashing Slow   1 Sec On   1 Sec Off  Zone Is Manually Isolated    Table 8  Zone Indicators       AWAY Indicator    The AWAY indicator is used to display that the system is armed in AWAY Mode  The AWAY  indicator will also flash in unison with the STAY indicator when Installer s Programming Mode  or Master Code Functions are used     Refer to page 52 for more information on the different methods on arming the system in  AWAY Mode     Indicator Definition    Off System Is Not Armed In AWAY Mode    Table 9  AWAY Indicator       ISSUE130 Elect
131. e The Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer    1     Before connecting the hand held programmer onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING  KEY  make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position  and that no external key has been plugged onto the hand held programmer     Enter Installer s Programming Mode  i e  12234 followed by the   button    Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the data currently  programmed in    LOCATION 000        Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held  programmer     Enter command 9 6 4 followed by the   button   Two beeps will be heard after the programming keys data has been deleted     Before removing the programming key from the hand held programmer  enter command    9 6 O followed by the   button to exit Installer s Programming Mode  Two beeps  will be heard and the system will now return to the disarmed state     Failing to exit Installer   s Programming Mode before removing the programming key  may result in corrupting the programming key     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programming 37    Command 965   Set Up Domestic Dialling Format    Command 965 has been included to allow the set up of the domestic dialling format a one step  operation  Refer to page 120 for more information on Domestic Dialling Format     After you enter Installer s Programming Mode  enter command 9 6 5 followed by the    button  The command will automatically s
132. e also increases the security of the system as there are  eleven possible EOL resistor values that can be used  This makes it extremely difficult for  anyone to tamper with the system     If split EOL resistors have been selected  the control panel will look for six burglary zones   Zones 1   4 consisting of 3K3 EOL resistors and zones 5 and 6 in parallel to zones 1 and 2  consisting of 6K8 EOL resistors  and two 24 hour zones  7 and 8  consisting of 6K8 resistors  connected in parallel  The zone 1 terminal on the PCB becomes the terminal for zones 1 and 5     Caution should be exercised when using split EOL resistors to create six burglary zones   and two 24 hour zones  This configuration is only suitable for normally closed contacts    If normally open contacts are used  as is the case with most types of smoke detectors  a    short circuit on one zone will trigger both zones connected in parallel     If you require N O contacts when using split EOL resistors  refer Connections Of Split  EOL Resistors Using N O Contacts on page 160 for information on how to connect N O  contacts     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Zone Information 159    Connections Of Split FOL Resistors Using N C Contacts       ZONE 6 6  8    ZONE 3 3K3             Figure 7  Connections Of Split EOL Resistors For 8 Zones    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    160 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Connections Of Split FOL Resistors Using N O Contacts  
133. e different zone types that may be selected     Zone No Zone Type Zone No Zone Type    Delay 1     2          st OO OO    a Had       8   Hour Tamper    Table 1  Zone Defaults For Solution 862       Zone lypes    There are thirteen different zone types to choose from when programming zones  These  thirteen different zone types are available for all Solution 862 control panels  Refer to  Zone Programming on page 161 for more information on programming zones     Lone Type Description Zone Type Description    1  mae   o      Hear Tamper      4           m                    hanom     Chime                  Table 2  Available Zone Types    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programming       This section includes the following     Programming   Programming With The Remote Codepad  Programming With The Hand Held Programmer  Programming With The Programming Key  Programming Option Bits   Installer s Programming Commands   Disable Factory Default    Defaulting The Control Panel    22 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Programming    The programming options of the control panel are stored in a non volatile EPROM  This  memory will hold all the relevant configuration and user specific data even during a total  power loss     The data retention time is as long as ten years without power  therefore  no reprogramming will  be required after powering the control panel down     The data can be changed as many times as required without the need for any additional    specia
134. e every minute  If the control panel has been programmed to  report      AC mains fail to a base station receiver   AC Fail  report  Contact ID Event Code  301  will be transmitted     The MAINS indicator will cease to flash as soon as the AC mains supply has been reconnected   When the AC mains supply has been continuously connected for a period of two minutes  the  codepad will cease the once a minute beep and  AC Fail  restore report will be transmitted to  the base station receiver     If Option 1     Enable AC Fail In 1 Hour in  LOCATION 426    on page 217 has been enabled   the codepad will flash the MAINS indicator as soon as the AC mains supply has been  disconnected and will not activate the dialler or the codepad buzzer unless the AC mains  supply has been disconnected continuously for a period of 1 hour     If Option 2   Ignore AC Mains Fail in  LOCATION 426  on page 217 has been enabled  the    codepad will not indicate when the AC mains supply has failed  but the control panel will still  report if enabled an  AC Fail  report     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Remote Radio Transmitter Operations       This section includes the following           Remote Radio Transmitter Operations    Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User Codes     2 Channel Radio Remote Hand Held Transmitter Operations      4 Channel Radio Remote Hand Held Transmitter Operations    68    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Remote Radio Transmitter Operations    ISSUE130    
135. e g   FAULT indicator on      Indicator Definition       90   There Is A System Fault That Needs To Be Rectified    Off The System Is Normal  There Are No Faults    Flashing There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged    Table 18  FAULT Indicator       Programming Mode    These two indicators will flash when the system has entered either Installer s Programming  Mode or when any Master Code Functions are used     Off Indicator Zone Sealed    The indicator will illuminate when the system is in the disarmed state or Installer   s  Programming Mode has been entered and will flash when a zone becomes unsealed during the  disarmed state  The indicator will stop flashing when all zones are sealed     On Indicator Zone In Alarm    The indicator will illuminate when the system is armed in AWAY Mode and will flash  when an alarm occurs  The indicator will reset once a valid user code has been entered     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    50 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Audible Indicators    In general  the audible indications given out by the codepad are as follows     Indicator Definition    A Button Has Been Pressed On The Codepad Or End  One Short Beep Of Exit Time When Armed In Either STAY Mode 1 Or  STAY Mode 2    Two Short Beeps The System Has Accepted Your Code    Three Short Beeps The Requested Function Has Been Executed    One L B Indicates The End Of Exit Time In AWAY Mode Or  nene DEEP The Requested Operation Has Been Denied Or Abort
136. e heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will  extinguish  The system will now return to the disarmed state     Enter your  MASTER cope  followed by 2 and the  AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     If there are telephone numbers programmed  they will be displayed one digit at a time  via the codepad indicators     If there are no telephone numbers programmed  a further two beeps will be heard after  entering this mode  These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last  phone number has been displayed     Enter all the digits for  PHONE No 1   one digit at a time  You will notice as each digit is  entered  the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate     If there is more than one telephone number  press the  stay  button followed by the 4  button after the last digit of the telephone number  This will insert a break between the  first telephone number and the second telephone number  If there is only one telephone    number  press the button to exit this mode     Enter all the digits for PHONE       2         digit at a time  You will notice as each digit is  entered  the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate     After the last digit of the second telephone number  press the LAWAY  button to exit this  mode unless a third telephone number is required  If there is a third telephone number    to be programmed  press the  stay  button followed by the A button to insert a break  betwee
137. e must be unsealed before it can register as a valid pulse    Inertia sensors should use options 0   7  while PIR detectors should use options 8     15     duxi     24 Hour zones do        receive any handover pulses from other zones  24 Hour zones may    handover pulses to other zones     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Zone Information    Example    167    Zone Options 1    When programming this location  you will notice that there are four options per location  You  may select one  two  three or all four of these options  however  only one number needs to be  programmed  This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together  Program a  seven  7  if you require options 1  2 and 4 simultaneously  i e  1  2   4   7      Option   Description    Lockout Siren Lockout Dialler    Delay Alarm Reporting    4  Silent Alarm   8  sensor Watch                           Table 74  Zone Options 1    Lockout Siren  amp  Lockout Dialler    Lockout means one activation per arming cycle  i e  A zone programmed for  Lockout  can  only cause the sirens or dialler to operate once      When the system is next armed  the zone can cause the sirens and dialler to operate once more   Restore signals will be transmitted when the system has been disarmed     The Solut ion 862 control panel performs lockout different to most other control panels in  that only the first zone to trigger an alarm condition will be locked out       other zones that are  triggered d
138. e system is in the disarmed state        Function Description Page              3  Change Telco Arm Disarm Sequence       w      Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones    LOW 85  EDMSAT   Satellite Siren Service Mode  7       Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On Off    Walk Test Mode 87    Event Memory Recall Mode 88   9 mem       Table 25  Installer Code Functions    Reserved    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions    Example    a    77    Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test Report    If you require the first test to report  Contact ID Event Code 602  the day after you are  installing the control panel and you have programmed the repeat interval between each test  report for every 7 days  you will need to set when the first test report will occur  If the first test  report is not set using this Installer Code Function  the first test report will be sent to the base  station receiver in the number of days programmed in the repeat interval  Refer to   LOCATION 360   366  on page 187 for setting the test report time and repeat interval     How To Set The First Test Report    1  Enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by l and the  AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     2  Enter the  No  oF Days  to wait  1   15 days  until the first test report is required     3  Press the button when finished   Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish  The  system will now r
139. e system to be radio controlled and you would like to give your  customer total control via a radio hand held remote transmitter           chal iat FOVAYSLNI ASO NO SS3T3HIM NOILNIOS             RED WIRE    AUXILIARY   Em  AMMODULE A BLACK WIRE  ERI 922  oo 390   3 3289   o         5L   E889  i3     23 8  9s  oo  9o  Qn a  y   Fa     28    sg                8  58   m         our 8  gag  a           E  e388      37     ora  es  g                                   Figure 11  Solution Wireless ON OFF Interface  WE800     2 Channel Radio Interface  RF005     The EDM 2 channel radio interface has been designed to allow customers to remotely operate  Solution control panels and control two on board relays  The interface may also be used as a  stand alone receiver  independent of a Solution control panel and used solely for remote control  of external devices connected to the two on board relays     The interface   s operating frequency is 304 Mhz with the ability to store up to 120 radio remote  codes  When connecting the interface to a Solution control panel  there is only a three wire  connection in parallel to the codepad and Option 8 in    LOCATION 427    on page 218 needs to  be programmed     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Optional Equipment    225    EDMSAT   Satellite Siren   5914     The EDMSAT Satellite Siren is a totally self contained unit incorporating a high powered siren  and a weatherproof strobe  A 1 2 AH sealed lead acid battery needs to be fi
140. e will prompt the operator with a    Terminate    or    Continue    message     External Modem Module  CC811  Required For Upload Download    this option has been selected  the control panel will use the external plug in Modem Module   If this option has b lected  th 1 panel will h   plug in Modem Modul   CC811  for remote programming operations via the Alarm Link Software  CC816   This  option should only be enabled where the telephone line is susceptible to noise     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    User Codes       This section includes the following       Installer Code     User Codes      User Code Priority    150 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Access Codes    This section describes the access codes that are used to assign privileges and access functions  for user code holders of the system  Two types of user codes exist within the system  the  Installer Code and User Codes  Each of these codes allow specific access and operation of the  varied functions of the control panel     Installer Code    LOCATION 181   184 1234    This code is used to access the Installer s Programming Mode and can be between one to four  digits long  However  after the control panel has been powered up  the Installer Code can  disarm the system if it is the first code used  The next time the Installer Code is used  access  into Installer s Programming Mode will be made     Installer Code functions are available to allow the installer to carry out various functio
141. eard and the  hand held programmer will display the current data stored in  LOCATION 000            To move to another programming location  enter the LOCATION NUMBER required followed    by the   button  The data of the new location will now be displayed  e g  3 4 followed by    the   button will automatically step you to the beginning of the Subscriber ID Number for  Receiver 1      To move to the next location  press the   button  This will step you to the next location and  the data in that location will be displayed  e g  If you are currently positioned at    LOCATION    034     pressing the   button will step you to    LOCATION 035         If you press the LSTA  button without previously entering a location number  the system will    step back one location  e g  If you are positioned at    LOCATION 035    and you press the    button  you will step back one location to LOCATION 034      To change data in the current location  enter the new value  0     15  followed by the   button   This will store the new data into the location and still leave you positioned at the same  location  You will notice that the new information programmed will be displayed on the data    display of the hand held programmer  e g  If you enter the value 1 4 followed by the    button  the data display will display 14      To move to the next location  press the   button  The data in the next location will now be  displayed     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    26    ISS
142. ed  Walk Test Mode Is Currently Active Or Warning  One Short Beep Every Second Before Automatic Arming Takes Place  One Short Beep Every Two Telephone Monitor Mode Is Active  Seconds  One Short Beep Every Minute   There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged    Table 19  Audible Indications       ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Operations       This section includes the following      Arming The System In AWAY Mode     Disarming The System From AWAY Mode     Arming The System In STAY Mode 1     Disarming The System From STAY Mode 1     Arming The System In STAY Mode 2     Disarming The System From STAY Mode 2    Codepad Duress Alarm    Codepad Panic Alarm    Codepad Fire Alarm    Codepad Medical Alarm  9 Isolating Zones      Fault Analysis Mode    52    Solution 862 Installation Manual    System Operations    ISSUE130    y    Method One            Method Two    This section explains the general operations of the system  The operations will explain how to  arm and disarm the system in the various modes  how to isolate zones  initiate codepad alarms  and determine any fault that may occur     Arming The System In AWAY Mode    Arming the system in AWAY Mode is normally performed when you leave the premises and  require that all zones be activated in a ready state to detect any intrusion     There are two different methods for arming the system in AWAY Mode  Method one is  standard and will always operate  Method two is optional and needs
143. een set using this function  the date and time fault will only  display when the Auto Arming Time in    LOCATION 414   417    on page 208 has been    programmed  or when you enter Fault Analysis Mode by holding down the D button     How To Set The New Date and Time    1  Enter your  MASTER cope  followed by 6 and the AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash       J 2  Enter the day  month  year  hour and minute using the  DD  MM  YY  HH  MM  format   i e  DD   Day of the month  MM   Month of the year  YY   Current year  HH   Hour  of the day  MM   Minute of the day      Please note that when programming the hour of the day  you will need to use 24 00 hour  format     3  Press the  AWAY  button when finished   Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish  If a long  beeps is heard  an error was made when entering the date and time     E  MASTER cone    6    away   DD MM YY HH MM                  Example  If the date and time needs to be set for the 1st January 1997 at 10 30 PM  program the date and  time as follows     a 2580  6   AW    O 1 0 1 9   2 2 3 0     awww    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions    a    105    Walk Test Mode    Walk test mode allows you to test detection devices to ensure that they are functioning  correctly  Before activating walk test mode  isolate any zones that are not required for testing   Refer to Isolating Zones on page 60 
144. een the equipment and the plug pack  This connection may be  required for lightning protection on equipment that is connected to phone lines or for safety  reasons such as earthing of metal enclosures     Solution Codepad Mimic Board  CC820     The Solution Codepad Mimic Board  CC820  has been designed to allow you to have a  separate output indicator for each indicator found on the remote codepad  This will be useful  to remotely display system status information     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Optional Equipment    227    2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface  FATUT     The 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface  FA101  has been designed to allow high quality 2 wire   24 volt DC smoke detectors to be easily connected to the Solution range of control panels  The  interface provides the 24 volts required to power the smoke detector and also provides a relay  output that is used to trigger the control panel  Multiple detectors may be connected to the  same interface     Radio Key Keyswitch Interface  CC813     This interface was designed to allow simple interfacing of a momentary keyswitch or radio  equipment for remote control operations to operate the control panel     If the R K terminal is used  a number of momentary keyswitches may be connected in parallel  for multiple arm disarm locations  The ON and OFF terminals can be used to directly interface  to any access control system     The HOME terminal will force the system to arm and disarm in STAY Mode 1     Th
145. een triggered will be locked out according to their individual lockout  settings     Example  All eight zones have been programmed for lockout siren with a swinger shutdown count of 3   If zone 1 triggers an alarm  the swinger shutdown count will decrement by one after the end of  siren run time to a swinger shutdown count of 2     After the siren run time has reset from the previous alarm  zone 2 triggers an alarm and  reactivates the sirens  After the sirens have reset  the swinger shutdown count has decremented  again from 2 to 1     If zone 3 also triggers an alarm after the sirens have reset from zone 2  the swinger shutdown  count has decremented from 1 to 0  therefore locking out all three zones from sounding the  sirens again until the system has been reset     However  at this point in time  the swinger shutdown count for sirens has again a lockout count    of 3 and the process of swinger shutdown for the remaining zones begin again until all zones  have been locked out     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    174 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler    LOCATION 324 6    Location Description    324 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler  0 15     Table 79  Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler Location    This location determines the number of times the dialler can be triggered before any lockout  options will take effect  A minimum of one zone must be programmed for lockout dialler for  this location to be effective
146. elay Alarm Reporting Time    LOCATION 406     407  Defaulted To 00 Seconds  0 0    Location Description    Increments Of 1 Second  0   15 Sec   s        Increments Of 16 Seconds  0    240 Sec   s     Table 110  Delay Alarm Reporting Time Locations    These locations programs the time in seconds that a delayed report waits dormant in the dial  buffer before reporting to the receiving party  If a user code holder resets the alarm condition  within this time frame  the control panel will clear the dialler buffer and prevent the alarm from  reporting to the receiving party     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    206 Solution 862 Installation Manual  Sensor Watch Time    LOCATION 408   409 00    Location Description       Increments Of Days  Tens Digit     Increments Of Days  Units Digit     Table 111  Sensor Watch Time Locations    The time set in these two locations determine how many days  0 99  a zone may remain sealed  before registering as a fault  This feature is only active when the system is in the disarmed  state  If a zone programmed for sensor watch has not become unsealed and reset during this  time  the FAULT indicator will illuminate  Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 64 for further  information on sensor watch faults  Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 167 for programming  zones for sensor watch     The sensor watch time counter is only active whilst the control panel is disarmed  Therefore  if  the system is only disarmed for 8 hours a day 
147. elco disarming sequence   Three beeps will be heard     If a previous telco disarming sequence has already been programmed  the sequence will  be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators  Refer to    Table 39   Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence    on page 96 for the  indicators and their meanings    If no telco disarming sequence has been programmed  a further two beeps will be heard    after entering this mode  These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the  call forward sequence has been displayed     Enter  stay  2 1  stay 2 and the LAWAY  button     Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state     SESE  3 nd  2   fu    sw 2 1 E2             How To Disable The Telco Disarming Sequence    If at any time you wish to cancel the telco disarming sequence  you may enter your     MASTER cope  followed by    and the button  followed by 2 and the button     then the button followed by the 4 and the button        WASTER            3    Rw   2   fom       ST    4           Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions    Example    8    101    Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones    This function allows the Master Code Holder to select which zones are to be automatically  isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 2     Every time the system is armed in STAY Mode 2  the zones selected using this function will be  automatically isolated     To arm the system in STAY Mode 2  hold 
148. elepermit Notes    242    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Warranty Statement    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited warrants this product to be free from  defects in material and workmanship for a period of three years from the date of manufacture  as indicated by the date stamp and  or the serial number on the product     Defective units returned by the purchaser at their own expense during this period will be  repaired or replaced at the option of the manufacturer  The repair or replacement will be free of  charge provided that the defects were not incurred during shipping or handling  or the damage  was not due to causes beyond the control of Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty  Limited  such as lightning  excessive voltage  mechanical shock or damage arising out of  abuse  alteration or improper application of the equipment     Year 2000 Compliance    ISSUE130    This notice is to confirm that all Solut ion 862 control panels are not susceptible to  or can  be corrupted by the    Year 2000 Millennium Bug        To date  all Solut ion products that incorporate time keeping functions employ a rotating 100    year calendar  This means that the Solut ion products do not use the century in any time  keeping algorithms  only the year within the century     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Specifications    Specifications    Temperature Range   Humidity    Power Source     Stand By Current     Current Draw In Alarm Condition     Current D
149. elephone number  press the  stay  button followed by the 4  button after the last digit of the telephone number  This will insert a break between the  first telephone number and the second telephone number  If there is only one telephone    number  press the button to exit this mode     4  Enter all the digits for PHONE No 2  one digit at a time  You will notice as each digit is  entered  the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate     5  After the last digit of the second telephone number  press the button to exit this    mode unless a third telephone number is required  If there is a third telephone number    to be programmed  press the button followed by the     button to insert a break  between the second telephone number and the third telephone     ac  MASTER cone    2    AWAY      PHONE No 1     5                 PHONE No  2     away     Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program                 d ee          Followed By 1   03 B   Fottowea By 2       __  Four Second Pause     Followed By       Followed By 4       Table 36  Domestic Dialling Digits    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions 95    Example  If you wish to program two separate telephone numbers  9672 1777 and 9672 1233   follow  the sequence below and replace the telephone numbers mentioned in the manual with the  telephone numbers that you wish to program          2580  2   wj   96721777  5  4    96721233       How To Disable Domestic D
150. elephone ring tone is 1 5 seconds  programming the ring burst time more than the  telephone ring duration  1 5 seconds   the control panel will not detect an incoming call   Always program the ring burst time less than the duration of the ring tone     al These locations are factory set and should not be changed unless required     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Dialler Options       This section includes the following      Dialler Options 1     Dialler Options 2      Dialler Options 3      Alarm Link Options    144 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Programming Option Bits  When programming these locations  you will notice that there are four options per location     You may select one  two  three or all four of these options  however  only one number needs to  be programmed  This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together     Example  If at  LOCATION 177  you want options 1  2 and 4  add the numbers together and the total is  the number to be programmed  In this example  the number to be programmed is 7  i e  1   2   4 7         Description  Dialler Reporting Functions Allowed    Remote Arming Via The Telephone Allowed       ae  Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed    8   Use Bell 103 For FSK Format  Disabled   CCITT V21        Table 63  Example   Programming Option Bits    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Dialler Options 145    Dialler Options 1    LOCATION 177 9    Option Description  Diall
151. eleting or changing user codes       1 The priority level for each user code can only be programmed or altered by the installer     User Code 16 will report when any of the following methods for arming and disarming are  used     1  Arm and disarm via remote radio control equipment connected to the optional Radio  Key Keyswitch Interface  CC8 13      2  Arm and disarm the system via Alarm Link Software  CC816     3  Arm the system remotely over the telephone    4  Single button arming in AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2   5  Single button disarming from STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2    6  Automatic arming in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1     7  Automatic disarming from AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    152    Solution 862 Installation Manual    User Codes    ISSUE130    The control panel has the ability to have up to eight programmable user codes  User Codes 1      8  to operate the system  Refer to System Operations on page 52 for information on the  different methods of arming and disarming the system     User codes 9     16 have been included to allow those systems that require radio remote control  via hand held remote transmitters  Refer to Remote Radio Transmitter Operations on page 68  for information on remote operations and adding and deleting remote radio user codes     Location 185   189 EEE E   194  User Code 1  o User Code 2 15       Location 195   199 Location 200   204 Location 205   209   User 
152. ember to substitute the default Master Code  2580  with the  Master Code that has been programmed     us    4    away          Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    102    a      xample    a    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    How To Disable STAY Mode 2 Zones  If at any time you wish to disable all zones selected to be automatically isolated for STAY    Mode 2  you may enter your followed by 4 and the button  followed by  the button         WASTER con    4    awww      AWAY     Turning Outputs On Off    If an output has been programmed for remote operation  you can turn the remote output on or  off using this Master Code function or remotely using the Alarm Link Software     For this Master Code Function to operate  one or more of the following output event types need  to be programmed in any of the programmable outputs     Output Number 1   Output Event Type     2 8 on page 197   Output Number 2   Output Event Type     2 9 on page 197   Output Number 3   Output Event Type     2 10 on page 197     How To Turn An Output On From The Remote Codepad    1  Enter your  MASTER cope  followed by 5 and the  AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     2  Enter the required  ouTPUT        1 3  followed by the button     Three beeps will be heard and the output will now turn on  Repeat step 2 if more than  one output is required to be turned on     3  Press the  away  button again to exit this fun
153. emely tolerant to abuse or incorrect wiring  It should be noted that each output is open collector and  will not source any current but can sink a maximum of 400 mA per output     These relay contacts are fully programmable as with the strobe and output 1  The relay is factory  defaulted as an alarm output  Sirens Running   Event Type 1 15      The N O contact is the connection point for the positive side of a DC siren such as a piezo screamer  The  negative side of the DC siren needs to be connected to the GND terminal  A link  JP2  is provided on  the PCB for connecting the COM terminal to either GND or 12V  This link should be connected to  12V  as shown in  Figure 12  Solution 862 Wiring Diagram  on page 234  The relay is rated at 1 Amp 30 V  DC     These terminals are zones three and four  Their common terminal is  12V  All normally closed contacts  are to be wired in series with the EOL resistor and where normally open contacts are to be wired in  parallel with the EOL resistor  The function of the zones and their response times are programmable via  the system programming options  If split EOL has been programmed  this will enable 24 hour zones or  keyswitch zones to be connected in parallel to zones three and four to act as zones seven and eight     These two terminals are for power to detectors and other equipment  They are fuse protected by a 1 amp  fuse     These terminals are zones one and two  Their common terminal is  12V  All normally closed contacts  are to be
154. emote codepad and the system will  return to the disarmed state     Failing to exit Installer   s Programming Mode before removing the programming key  may result in corrupting the programming key     How To Copy Programming Key Memory To Control Panel Using Hand Held Programmer  1  Before connecting the hand held programmer onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING    KEY  make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position  and that no external key has been plugged onto the hand held programmer     2  Enter Installer s Programming Mode  i e  1234 followed by the   button    Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the data currently  programmed in    LOCATION 000        3  Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held  programmer     4  Enter command 9 6 3 followed by the   button   Two beeps will be heard after the programming key s data has successfully been copied  into to the control panel  If you heard a long beep after issuing this command  the  programming key has become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt  data  Refer to Command 964   Erase Programming Key on page 36 for more  information     5  Before removing the programming key from the hand held programmer  enter command    9 6 O followed by the   button to exit Installer s Programming Mode  Two beeps  will be heard and the system will now return to the disarmed state     Failing to exit Installer   s Programming Mode befo
155. ensor Trouble  report   Contact ID Event Code 380  will be transmitted to indicate that one or more zones have been  automatically isolated by the system  24 hour zones that are unsealed at the end of exit time  will not transmit a  Sensor Trouble  report as the restore for that zone is still outstanding     A  Sensor Trouble  restore report will be transmitted for burglary zones when the zone reseals  or when the system is next disarmed  which ever happens first   A 24 hour zone will only    transmit a restore signal when it has resealed     The trouble code parameter is used as the expansion digit in 4 2 Format  It has no effect on  Contact ID Format as a  Sensor Trouble  report will always be reported on event code 380     If  Sensor Trouble  reports are not required  program  LOCATION 327     328  with a zero     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    178 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Zone Status     Sensor Watch Reports  LOCATION 329   330 45    Location Description    Sensor Watch Report       Sensor Watch Restore Report    Table 82  Zone Status     Sensor Watch Report Locations    A  Self Test Failure  report  Contact ID Event Code 307  will be transmitted to the base  station receiver when a zone has not been triggered during the Sensor Watch Time  programmed in  LOCATION 408   409  on page 206  This report will continue to be  transmitted  according to the frequency of the sensor watch time  until the fault has been  rectified     To clear
156. ent     Restore reports are not transmitted for this event  If a  Panic  report is not required   program  LOCATION 337   338  with a zero     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Reporting Information 181    Codepad Fire Report    LOCATION 339   340    y    7 2     Location Description    Codepad Fire Reporting Code  Units Digit        Codepad Fire Reporting Code  Tens Digit     Table 88  Codepad Fire Report Locations    A  Fire Alarm  report  Contact ID Event Code 110  will be transmitted to the base station    receiver when the 4 and 6 buttons are pressed simultaneously  This is an audible alarm   Refer to Option 2 in  LOCATION 425  on page 216 if you require codepad fire to be silent  A  distinct fire sound is emitted through the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm condition   The fire sound is different to the burglary sound     Restore reports are not transmitted for this event  If a  Fire  report is not required   program  LOCATION 339   340  with a zero     Codepad Medical Report    LOCATION 341   342    7 23     Location Description    Codepad Medical Reporting Code  Tens Digit        Codepad Medical Reporting Code  Units Digit     Table 89  Codepad Medical Report Locations    A  Medical  report  Contact ID Event Code 100  will be transmitted to the base station    receiver when the 7 and    buttons        pressed simultaneously  This is an audible alarm   Refer to Option 4 in  LOCATION 425  on page 216 if you require codepad me
157. ep will be heard from the  horn speaker  If the strobe indications have been enabled  the strobe will flash for 3  seconds to indicate that the system has been disarmed     Panic Alarm    1  Press both the AWAY button        the STAY button together for two seconds      the  hand held transmitter  This will initiate an audible panic alarm that will activate the  horn speaker  strobe and internal sirens     If Option 1     Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent has been programmed in    LOCATION  425  on page 216  the remote radio panic alarm will also be silent     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Remote Radio Transmitter Operations 73    There are two remote outputs than can be operated from the DOOR and AUX buttons on the 4   channel hand held transmitter  These outputs can only be programmed by the installer  The  output event types that can be used are listed in the table below  Refer to the section on  Programmable Outputs on page 189 for more information     Output Event Type Description Page    Radio Control Output 1 197  Radio Control Output 2 197    Radio Control Output 1     Not Armed In AWAY Mode 197  Radio Control Output 2     Not Armed In AWAY Mode 197    Table 24  Remote Output Event Types       Turning Output 1 ON    1  Press the DOOR button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds   Output 1 will now turn on     Turning Output 1 OFF    1  Press the DOOR button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds   Output 1 will now turn off     Turni
158. epad duress alarm report  refer to     LOCATION 336    on page 180 for more information  If you require to activate a duress alarm  by adding a number 3 to the end of any valid user code being used to disarm the system  enable  Option 2 in    LOCATION 430    on page 221     F com  9    anor    Codepad Panic Alarm    An audible codepad panic alarm will be activated when both the 1 and    buttons    co  or both the  stay and buttons are pressed simultaneously     Refer to Option 1 in  LOCATION 425  on page 216 if you wish to program codepad  panic to be silent  If you wish to disable the codepad panic alarm report  refer to   LOCATION 337   338  on page 180 for more information  A codepad panic alarm    7 8    STAY MAINS FAULT AWAY will transmit a Contact ID Event Code 120 when reporting back to a base station    receiver                1   3 or  stav    AWAY     L       PANIC           Le    Codepad Fire Alarm    L    FIRE        An audible codepad fire alarm will be activated when both the 4 and    buttons on  Lo      L       MEDICAL           the remote codepad are pressed simultaneously  A distinct fire sound is emitted  through the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm condition  The fire sound is     0  different to the burglary sound        L    PANIC        Refer to Option 2 in  LOCATION 425  on page 216 if you wish to program codepad  fire to be silent  If you wish to disable the codepad fire alarm report  refer to     LOCATION 339   340    on page 181 for more i
159. er Reporting Functions Allowed    1  Remote Arming Via The Telephone Allowed       Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed       Use Bell 103 For FSK Format  Disabled   CCITT V21     Table 64  Dialler Options 1    Dialler Reporting Functions Allowed      If this option has been selected  the dialler will function for all operations  Upload Download  via Alarm Link Software  CC816  and telephone remote arming will remain operational  regardless of this setting     Disabled   Disable All Dialler Reporting Functions    If this option is not selected  the communication dialler will not operate  Upload Download via  Alarm Link Software  CC816  and telephone remote arming will remain operational regardless  of this setting     Remote Arming Via The Telephone Allowed  2 If this option has been selected  you can remotely arm the system via a standard telephone    using the Phone Controller  CC911  or by pressing the   button on your touch tone  telephone  Refer to Remote Arming Via The Telephone on page 112 for more information   Forced arming is automatically assumed when this feature is being used  Refer to Zone  Options 2 on page 171 for more information on forced arming     Whether remote functions have been enabled or disabled  this will have no effect on remote  arming via the telephone  Refer to Ring Count on page 140 for programming the number of  rings before the control panel will answer an incoming call     Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed    4 This option needs t
160. er Tester  DD901     The hand held dialler tester simulates a base station for testing of the control panel s dialling  functions  It communicates in most formats     Cellular Dialers    The cellular dialler when connected to the control panel will transmit alarm information via the  cellular phone network to the base station receiver when a land telephone line is not present or  has been tampered with     P 100 Power Supply Module  PS100     The PS100 Power Supply Module has been designed for applications requiring 13 8 volts DC  at currents of up to 1 Amp and must be used in conjunction with the TF008   18 volt AC plug  pack     The unit comes complete with our standard  fully short circuit proof  power out and battery  charging terminals as well as a DC LED indicator and AC mains fail output  For situations  requiring an uninterrupted power source  a rechargeable sealed lead acid battery can be  connected  In the event of an AC mains failure  the power supply will switch to battery power  without interrupting the load being supplied     1008 Plug Pack  TF008     The TF008 plug packs have been designed to be used with the EDM control panels and the  PS100 Power Supply Module  The plug pack includes built in thermal fuses which under  overload or fault conditions will blow and eliminate any possible fire threat due to excessive  heat build up inside the casing     The TFOOS plug pack incorporates a three wire flying lead that enables a mains earth  connection to be made betw
161. ere is also a PANIC terminal that allows the customer to issue a panic alarm from a remote  keyswitch or hand held radio transmitter     This is handy if you require your system to be radio controlled and you would like to give your  customer total control via a hand held radio remote     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    228 Solution 862 Installation Manual    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Terminals and Descriptions       This section includes the following         Terminal Definitions and Descriptions    Glossary Of Terms       Solution 862 Wiring Diagram       Solution 862 Component Overlay      Telecom Connection Diagrams    230    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Terminal Detinitions and Descriptions    Terminal Description    EARTH    18V AC      BATTERY   BATTERY    GND   12V        DATA    STR  OUT 1   COM    COMM  N O     12V  14  13     12V  GND    12    11   12V    ISSUE130    This terminal should be connected to the green wire on the TF008 Plug Pack that is internally connected  to the mains earth  Extensive lightning protection has been built into the control panel and this terminal  will have to be connected correctly if you are to take the best advantage of the protection provided     These two terminals are plug on type  and are the termination point for      TFOOS Plug Pack  The  voltage of the plug pack being used must be 18   22 volts AC and rated at 1 3 Amps minimum for correct  operation     The
162. ered down and defaulted to clear this fault     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Operations    65    Fuse Fail    This fault will occur when either the 1 Amp     12 V accessories fuse or the 1 Amp codepad fuse  has failed  After 10 seconds has expired since the fuse had failed  the control panel will  automatically send a System Trouble code  Contact ID Event Code 300  to the base station  receiver  After the fuse has been replaced for a period of 10 seconds  a restore report will be  sent to the base station receiver     If both the 1 Amp     12 V accessories fuse and the 1 Amp codepad fuse have failed  only  one system trouble report will be sent to the base station receiver  Only after both fuses  have been replaced will any system trouble restore report will be sent to the base station  receiver     Communication Failure    A communication failure fault will register if the primary telephone number and secondary  telephone number for either Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 is unsuccessful in calling the receiving    party     When a communications fault occurs  to determine which receiver failed to report  hold down    the 8 button for two seconds until two beeps are heard  If Receiver 1 failed to report  zone 1  will illuminate  If Receiver 2 failed to report  zone 2 will illuminate     If the primary telephone number and secondary telephone number for Receiver 1 or Receiver 2  is set up for back to base reporting  Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 has a maximum
163. ero   then the answering of incoming calls will be  totally disabled irrespective of any programmed options     Answering Machine Bypass    Answering machine bypass has been incorporated so that it is possible to make a connection  with the control panel for remote arming or Upload Download when there is an answering  machine or facsimile machine on the same telephone line  There are two different methods of  using answering machine bypass as explained below  The secondary method should only be  used when there is a large amount of traffic on the line  e g   A home office   It will reduce the  chance of the control panel incorrectly answering incoming calls     1  Programming the ring count as 15 will enable  Answering Machine Bypass  in the  primary mode  When calling the control panel  let the phone ring for no more than 4  rings and then hang up  If you call again within 45 seconds  the control panel will  answer the call on the first ring and the connection will be established  This will  prevent the answering machine or facsimile from answering the call  Refer to Option 2  in  LOCATION 177  on page 145 if you wish to enable Answering Machine Bypass  Only When System Is Armed     2  Programming a 14 as the ring count will enable  Answering Machine Bypass  in the  secondary mode  In this mode  when calling the control panel  allow the phone to ring  for no more than 2 rings and then hang up  Wait a minimum of 8 seconds before calling  the control panel again  The control p
164. ero volts when the time parameter has expired  This  one shot time setting will always run its full duration and cannot be manually reset     Normally Low  One Shot Open With Retrigger    This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event  occurs  Every time the event occurs  it will restart the one shot timer  The output will switch  back to zero volts once the one shot time has expired     Normally Low  One Shot Open With Reset    This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event  occurs  The output will switch back to zero volts when the one shot time has expired or when  the event has returned to normal  This means the one shot timer can be shortened regardless of  the time setting     Normally Low  One Shot Open With Alarm    This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event  occurs  The output will switch back to zero volts when the one shot time has expired  when the  event has returned to normal or when the system has been disarmed  This means that the one  shot timer can be shortened regardless of the time setting     Normally Low  Latching Open  This polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs  The    output will switch back to zero volts once the 7 button on the remote codepad has been held  down until two beeps are heard  Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity     Electronics Design a
165. es 194  Day Alarm                                            193  Day Alarm Resetting                  sese 193  Dialer             aun Ite Rete 197  Dialler Disabled                                       197  EDMSAT   Satellite Siren                      sessessss 192  Entry Warning  aire et eriperet 193  Entry Warning   Day Alarm Resetting                     193  Ext         coire Ee edt 192  Exit Warning   Entry Warning                     eese 193  Exit Warning Finished                           esses 193  Exit Warning With All Zones Sealed Or Entry  bM 192  Fire Alarm Latching                   eeeeeeeee 196  Fire Alarm Resetting                     eee 196  Fire Alarm                                                196  air ec                          194  Global CHIME    cesses eite reet 198  Horn Speaker        iet rrt 195  Horn Speaker Monitor Fail                                       194  Kiss Off After Exit Time                    eese 193  Kiss Off R  cerv  d oira isentar aaa 194  Low Battery    iret eren iet 194  Mimic System Fault                      eese 196  Mimie Zone T    riter        S 198  Mime Zone 2    nr DERE 198  Mimi  ZONE  Jeron Dr 198  Mime Zore 4  eiit erre 198           Zone                   a 198  Mimic Zone           eere ern rds 198  Mimic Zone Teenie        198  Mimic Zone 8             nene 198  Radio Control Output 1                                        197  Radio Control Output 1   Not In AWAY Mode      197  Radio Control Output 2     
166. es is governed by the priority level  allocated to each user code holder  Some user code holders may not be able to isolate zones   Refer to User Code Priority on page 153 for further information     Zones that have been manually isolated using this method will transmit a zone bypass report     Contact ID Event Code 570  for each zone upon arming the system  A zone bypass restore  report will be transmitted when the system has been disarmed     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Operations 61    Standard Isolating    Standard isolating allows all operators to be able to isolate zones  Therefore  no code is  required to be used when isolating zones     1  Press the button twice   Three beeps will be heard     2    Enter the  ZONE NUMBER  required to be isolated followed by the  stay  button     The zone you just selected to be isolated will now begin to flash     24 hour zones will automatically isolate as soon as the button has been pressed   All other burglary zones will automatically isolate only after the system has been  armed     Repeat Step 2 if more than one zone is required to be isolated until all zones that are  required to be isolated have been selected     3  Press the  Away  button when finished selecting the zones to be isolated   Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state     The zones selected to be isolated when you arm the system in AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or  STAY Mode 2 will continue to flash until the s
167. escription    Test Reports Only When Armed    Test Report After Siren Reset    Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1    8 STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status      Table 129  Consumer Options 1       Test Reports Only When Armed      If this option has been selected  test reports  Contact ID Event Code 602  will only be sent  when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2  It is no  longer necessary to send a test report as well as an opening and closing report every day     During the working week  most commercial premises would be open and therefore a test report  is not necessary  as open and close reports would be sent at the time programmed  If you wish    to manually send a test report  hold down the O button until two beeps are heard     Refer to Test Reporting Time on page 187 to set the test report time required  To set the first  test report  refer to the Installer Code Function   Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test  Report on page 77     Test Report After Siren Reset    2 Selecting this option will force the control panel to send a test report after the siren has reset   This can be used to indicate to the monitoring station that the control panel itself has not been  tampered with during the alarm period     Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1    4 If automatic arming in STAY Mode 1 is preferred to automatic arming in AWAY Mode  this  option will need to be selected     Refer to    LOCATION 414   417    on page 208 to program the time that the control
168. est and fifteen is the fastest  The siren sound rate does not change the  frequency rate for the fire alarm tone     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    208 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Auto Arming Pre Alert Timer    LOCATION 413 1    Location Description       413 Increments Of 5 Minutes  0     75 Minutes     Table 115  Auto Arming Pre Alert Timer Location    This location sets the time period that will warn you before the control panel will automatically  arm in AWAY Mode  The codepad will beep once every second until the pre alert timer has  expired  after this time  the system will automatically arm itself in AWAY Mode  If you  require the system to automatically arm in STAY Mode 1  enable Option 4 in  LOCATION  428  on page 219     Once the control panel has automatically armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1  exit time  will commence  If a valid user code is entered during the pre alert time  the auto arming time  as programmed in  LOCATION 414   417  will extend by one hour     If you require a programmable output to operate during the auto arming pre alert time  refer to  Output Event Type     Auto Arm Pre Arming Alert Time on page 192     Auto Arming Time    LOCATION 414   417 0000    Location Description    Actual Hour Of The Day  Tens Digit   Actual Hour Of The Day  Units Digit     Table 116  Auto Arming Time Locations       These locations are used to program the actual time of the day that the system will  automatically arm itself in A
169. et Receiver 1 to domestic reporting and set the  following locations only for Receiver 2  No other locations will be changed when command  965 has been issued     All domestic telephone numbers are stored in    LOCATION 466     513     For more information  on programming domestic dialling  refer to Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting  on page 121 for more information     Location Description Setting          Table 6  Command 965 Defaults    As you can see from the table above  the transmission format has automatically been set for  domestic dialling and the Subscriber ID Number has been set for one identification beep  All  reports except zone status reporting and system status reporting have been allocated to  Receiver   for domestic dialling     This means that the zone status reports including zone bypass  zone trouble  sensor watch and  alarm restore codes as well as system status reports including fuse fail  AC fail  low battery and  access denied reports have been allocated to Receiver 2 and will not report unless Receiver 2  has also been set up to report     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    38    ISSUE130    Example    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Command 966   Enable Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations    This command allows automatic stepping of locations while programming via Installer   s  Programming Mode  When enabled via the hand held programmer  the decimal point of the  left most display will reflect the mode 
170. ets 247    Location 177 Page 145      1   Dialler Reporting Functions Allowed  Dialler Options 1 2   Remote Arming Via The Telephone Allowed  4   Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed  8   Use Bell 103 For FSK Format  Disabled     CCITT V21   Location 17B        Page 146  Dialler Options 2 1   Open Close Reports Only If Previous Alarm  p 2   Open Close Reports For STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2  4   Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete  8   Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30 Seconds To 55 Seconds                179                 147  Dialler Options 3 5   ana Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Second  4   Change Decadic Dialling To 60 40  8   Reserved  Alarm Link Options 1   Upload Download Allowed  P 2   Call Back Phone Number Required For Upload Download  4   Exit Upload Download Connection On Alarm  8   External Modem Module  CC811  Required For Upload Download  Location f81   184        00000000000  Page 150  Installer Code  Location 185   264                Page 151  User Codes  Location 185   189 Location 190   194           verter  Location 195   199 Location 200   204 Location 205   209  Location 210   214 Location 215   219 Location 220   224                    oli ili  Location 225   229 Location 230   234 Location 235   239  Radio Code 9 Radio Code 10   75 Radio Code 11  Location 240   244 Location 245   249 Location 250   254  Radio Code 12 Radio Code 13   75 Radio Code 14   75  Location 255   259 Location 260   264    Radio Code 15 Radio Code 16 15 15  15  15
171. eturn to the disarmed state      RSTALER CODE        Ww     Re OF AVS    fawn           Each time you enter Installer s Programming Mode after you have set when the first test  report will occur  the first test report time will default back to the repeat interval time  between each test report as set in    LOCATION 366        Test reports will not report if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000  The number of days  decrements by one at 2400 hours as set in  LOCATION 901     904  on page 210     If you programmed the repeat interval in the test reports for every seven days  but wish to have  the first test report to begin in two days time  follow the sequence outlined below     1234  1     2  s     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    78 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Changing Domestic Phone Numbers    2 When the system has been set up for domestic dialling  this function allows the installer to  view and program the required telephone numbers that the system will call in the event of an  alarm  For a more detailed description  refer to Domestic Dialling on page 119 for further  information     How To Change Domestic Phone Numbers    1  Enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by 2 and the  AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     If there are telephone numbers already programmed  they will be displayed one digit at  a time via the remote codepad indicators  Refer to  Table 27  Codepad Indicators When
172. f the first trigger the unit triggers again  no alarm will be  registered and the voltage to the smoke detector will again be disconnected for 15  seconds and then reapplied    If a third trigger is detected within 3 minutes of the first trigger   i e  3 pulses in 3  minutes  a fire alarm will be registered  Power to the smoke detector will be    maintained to facilitate unit identification via the detector memory     This output should be connected to the negative side of any fire smoke detector  To  configure an output for this feature  use the following settings     EVENT TYPE   2 7 POLARITY   10  TIMEBASE   2 MULTIPLIER   15    The zone that the fire smoke detector is connected to should be programmed as  follows     ZONE TYPE   13 ZONE PULSE COUNT   3    ZONE PULSE COUNT TIME   15    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programmable Outputs    28  2 kog    2  5    2 22     2 bs     30    31    32    33    197    Remote Control 1 2 9 Remote Control 2    Remote Control 3  These outputs can be remotely activated  Turned  On  or  Off   via the following  methods     1  Remote Codepad   Refer to the Master Code Functions   Turning Outputs  On Off on page 102 for further information     2  Remotely Via Alarm Link Software   Refer to your Alarm Link Instruction  Manual for further information     Radio Control Output 1  This output will operate when the button marked DOOR on the 4 channel hand held  transmitter is activated when the system is armed or disarmed   
173. fer to Set The Date and Time on page  19 for more information     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Introduction 19    How To Set The Date and Time    1  Enter your followed by 6 and the AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash       ul 2  Enter the day  month  year  hour and minute using the  DD  MM  YY  HH  MM  format   i e  DD   Day of the month  MM   Month of the year  YY   Current year  HH   Hour  of the day  MM   Minute of the day      Please note that when programming the hour of the day  you will need to use 24 00 hour  format        3  Press the button when finished   Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish  If a long  beeps is heard  an error was made when entering the date and time      ASTER 6000                DD MM Y Y                     aww        Example  If the date and time needs to be set for the Ist January 1997 at 10 30 PM  program the  date and time as follows          2580  6   mul     O04 1 0 1 9  7 4 2 2 3 0     AWAY     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    20    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Zone Defaults    The default zone settings of the control panel are listed in the table below  Zones 1     6 may be  programmed to any of the available zone types  Zones 7 and 8 are limited to that they may  only be programmed to any 24 hour or keyswitch type  Refer to  Table 2  Available Zone  Types  on page 20 for th
174. fer to Zone Types on page 162  for more information     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Event Timers 205  LOCATION 402     403  Defaulted To 60 Seconds  3    Location Description       Increments Of 1 Second  0   15 Sec s   Increments Of 16 Seconds  0    240 Sec s     Table 108  Exit Time Locations    Exit time can be programmed between 0 and 255 seconds in increments of one second  When  arming the system in AWAY Mode  the remote codepad will beep during exit time until the  remaining 10 seconds where the codepad will give you one continuous beep to inform you that  the end of exit time is approaching     The remote codepad will always give one short beep at the end of exit time when arming in  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2     Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode    LOCATION 404   405  Defaulted To 00 Seconds  0 0    Location Description    Increments Of 1 Second  0   15 Sec   s        Increments Of 16 Seconds  0    240 Sec s     Table 109  Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode Locations     Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode  is the delay time used for ALL zones except 24 hour  burglary and 24 hour fire zones when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2   Each zone including delay zones will have the entry delay as programmed in  LOCATION 404    405   i e  The entry guard timer will override the delay time programmed for a delay zone    If the entry guard timer has been programmed as  0  each zone will act as per its programmed  zone type     D
175. flash simultaneously  to indicate that you have now entered Installer   s Programming Mode  When entering  Installer   s Programming Mode  you will be automatically positioned at    LOCATION  000   the beginning of the Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1     Enter the Primary Telephone Number followed by the Secondary Telephone Number  and the Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1  Refer to Dialler Information on page  130 for more information     Remember that when programming a zero in the telephone numbers of Receiver   and  Receiver 2  a zero must be programmed as a ten  Programming a zero in the telephone  number will indicate the end of the dialling sequence  A zero must be programmed as a  zero in all other locations other than the telephone numbers for Receiver 1  Receiver 2  and the Call Back Telephone number  unless otherwise stated     Set the time for the test reports if required  Any other programming changes required  may also be made  otherwise the factory default settings will be used  Refer to Test  Reporting Time on page 187 for more information on programming test reports     Enter Installer   s Command 9 6    followed by the  AWAY  button to exit Installer   s  Programming Mode  Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will  extinguish  The system has now returned to the disarmed state and is now ready for use   Refer to Installer   s Programming Commands on page 29 for more information     Use the Master Code to set the date and time  Re
176. for further information     How To Enter Walk Test Mode    1  Enter your  MASTER cope  followed by 7 and the  AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash  The  codepad will beep once every second while the system is in walk test mode     2  Unseal and seal the zones to be tested   The codepad will sound one long beep and the horn speaker will sound one short beep  every time a zone is sealed or unsealed     3  Press the  AWAY button to exit this function     Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish  The  system has now returned to the disarmed state      WASTER            7                 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    106    ISSUE130    Example    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Event Memory Recall Mode    This function allows you to playback the last forty events that have occurred to the system   The event memory recall mode reports all alarms and arming disarming of the system in the  AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2  This function helps with trouble shooting  system faults  The events are displayed via the codepad indicators     How To Enter The Event Memory Recall Mode  1  Enter your  MASTER cope  followed by    and the  AWAY  button     Three beeps will be heard  The events will be played back via the codepad indicators in  reverse chronological order      WASTER cone        awww        If the events were as follows     Event No Event Description  
177. gin to flash until exit time expires  At the end of exit time  the ZONE indicators  will extinguish and the codepad will give one short beep     0    If a zone is not sealed at the end of exit time  the zone will be automatically isolated and will  be constantly illuminated on the remote codepad  The zone will become an active part of the  system again as soon as it has resealed  i e  If a window is left open after exit time has expired   the window will not be an active part of the system until it has closed  Opening the window  after exit time has expired will cause an alarm condition      Forced Arming  The feature of arming the system when a zone is not sealed is known as forced arming  Refer    to Zone Options 2 on page 171 to enable forced arming for each zone     If the STAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard when attempting to arm the  system  forced arming is not permitted  If this is the case  you must ensure that all zones are  sealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    58    y     Method One            Method Two    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Disarming The System From STAY Mode 2    There are two methods for disarming the system from STAY Mode 2  Method one is standard  and will always operate  Method two is optional and needs Option 4 to be enabled in   LOCATION 429  on page 220     Method two will not operate unless both Option 2 and Option 4 
178. gn and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    232    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Term Description    Exit Time or  Exit Delay    External Equipment    Forced Arming    Handover Delay    Hand Held Radio  Remote Control    Lockout Dialler  Lockout Siren    Master Code    Monitoring Station    Panic    Phone Controller    Radio Remote User Codes    Sealed    Sensor Watch    Silent Alarm    ISSUE130    Is the amount of time you have to leave your premises after you have armed your system     Is any device connected to your system such as detectors  codepads and sirens     Is a situation where your alarm system is permitted to be armed when one or more zones are  unsealed     When your system is armed and zone one is violated  the entry delay starts timing  If zone two is  then violated the entry delay time is handed over to zone two and so on through zones three and  four  This is known as sequential hand over delay     Hand held radio transmitters can be used to arm and disarm your system or cause a panic alarm     Lockout dialler means that the dialler will only activate once per zone per arming cycle   Lockout siren means that the sirens will only activate once per zone per arming cycle     Is a numerical code used for arming and disarming the system as well as allowing access to all  functions that are programmable through the codepad     Is a secure location where a digital receiver monitors numerous alarm systems and deciphers their  alarm transmission reports so tha
179. grams    TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR AUSTRALIA                   605 PLUG 611 SOCKET  TOP VIEW Yellow         TEM  ane BLACK           GREEN         6P4C PLUG          3  Not Connected    4  Not Connected    1   Green  Internal Phone Line  5   Yellow  Internal Phone Line    2   Black  Telecom Line  Street   6   Red  Telecom Line  Street     Telecom Line    TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR NEW ZEALAND             iN BLACK TOP VIEW  IN RED  CONTROL L                PANEL OUT c Y ELLOW    OUT peu RJ45 PLUG     Black  Telecom Line  Street    Red  Telecom Line  Street               Green  Internal Phone Line   Yellow  Internal Phone Line       TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR CHINA                                                                   TOP VIEW TOP VIEW  BLACK                M as Er l m  PANEL GREEN  i   l PLATE  YELLOW  4P4C PLUG RJ12 PLUG   Green  Internal Phone Line  Black  Telecom Line  Street    Yellow  Internal Phone Line  Red  Telecom Line  Street   Figure 15  Telecom Connection Diagrams For Solution 862  ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited       Internal Phones       Internal Phones    Telecom Line            Telecom Line    P    f    Internal Phones    Appendices       This section includes the following       Telephone Anti Jamming      Test Heports Only When Armed    238    Appendix A    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Telephone Anti Jamming    There are many companies today importing American designed products that claim 
180. has been enabled in   LOCATION 429  on page 220     How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 2  1  Enter your followed by the  stay  button     Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will extinguish  The system is now  disarmed           CODE     STAY     A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone  If this is the case a valid  user code will need to be used to disarm the system using method one  To enable method two   Option 4 in  LOCATION 429  on page 220 will need to be programmed     How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 2    1  Hold down the    button until two beeps are heard   The STAY indicator will extinguish and the system is now disarmed     0    Single button disarming from STAY Mode 2 will report as user code number 16     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Operations    1    Solution    2 3456    59    Codepad Duress Alarm  A codepad duress alarm is used as a silent hold up alarm  This will only occur when the    number    is added to the end of any valid user code that is being used to disarm the system   However  if a user code has a priority level of arming only  entering their user code followed  by 9 will still transmit a duress alarm when the system is armed     A duress alarm  Contact ID Event Code 121  is only useful if your system is reporting back to  a monitoring station or pocket pager as domestic reporting format can   t decipher which type of  alarm had occurred  If you wish to disable the cod
181. has this option included in the priority level  the user  will always send open and close reports back to the monitoring station  upon disarming and arming the system  This option requires  Open Close reports in    LOCATION 333   334    on page 179 to be  enabled for it to be effective    If any user code has this option included in the priority level  the  method of standard isolating is disabled from the system and only  user codes with code to isolate selected can isolate zones prior to  arming the system using the method of code to isolate  Refer to  Isolating Zones on page 60 for more information     Master Code Functi If any user code has this option included in the priority level  the user  aster Lode Functions  has access to all Master Code Functions     Table 68  User Code Priority Levels    Arm Disarm    Open Close Reports    Code To Isolate       Once user code priority levels 4  6  12 or 14 have been programmed to any of the  available 8 user codes  the method of standard isolating will no longer operate  Only  those user codes with the priority level of 4  6  12 or 14 will be able to isolate zones using  the method code to isolate     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    154 Solution 862 Installation Manual    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Zone Information       This section includes the following       Day Alarm Zones     Day Alarm Operation     EOL Resistor Value     Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using
182. he  same time allowing you to move freely within an area which has been automatically isolated     Programming zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 can be programmed either  by the Installer Code Function     Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 85 or Master Code  Functions   Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 101     Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode    When arming the system in STAY Mode 2  an optional entry timer called Entry Guard Timer  For STAY Mode may be used to delay the sirens  strobe and bell outputs if a zone that has not  been automatically isolated has triggered into alarm condition  Entry Guard Timer For STAY  Mode is the delay time used for all zones except 24 hour zones when the system is armed in  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2     If the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode has been programmed and a zone that has not been  automatically isolated has triggered  the codepad will beep twice a second until the Entry  Guard Timer For STAY Mode has expired or the system has been disarmed  If the alarm  condition has not been reset before Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode expires  the strobe   bell and siren outputs will activate into alarm     Single button arming in STAY Mode 2 will report as user code number 16     How To Arm The System In STAY Mode 2    1  Hold down the    button until two beeps are heard   The STAY indicator will illuminate and exit time will now commence     Any zones that have been programmed to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2  will be
183. he codepad will give one short beep     CODE    STAY            Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Operations 55    Method Two  How To Arm The System In STAY Mode 7    1  Hold down the  stay  button until two beeps are heard   The STAY indicator will illuminate and exit time will now commence     Any zones that have been programmed to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1  will begin to flash until exit time expires  At the end of exit time  the ZONE indicators  will extinguish and the codepad will give one short beep     B    If a zone is not sealed at the end of exit time  the zone will be automatically isolated and will  be constantly illuminated on the remote codepad  The zone will become an active part of the  system again as soon as it has resealed  i e  If a window is left open after exit time has expired   the window will not be an active part of the system until it has closed  Opening the window  after exit time has expired will cause an alarm condition      Forced Arming  The feature of arming the system when a zone is not sealed is known as forced arming  Refer    to Zone Options 2 on page 171 to enable forced arming for each zone     If the STAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard when attempting to arm the  system in STAY Mode 1  forced arming is not permitted  If this is the case  you must ensure  that all zones are sealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty
184. he horn speaker  bell  strobe or EDMSAT  outputs  The dialler and all other programmable outputs will function as per their particular  programming     Sensor Watch    Sensor watch gives the control panel the ability to recognise that detection devices may have  stopped working  This is a feature that monitors the operation of a zone over a programmed  time period  Refer to  LOCATION 408   409  on page 206 for programming sensor watch  time     This value determines how many 24 hour periods a zone may remain continuously sealed  before it registers as a sensor watch fault  The number of hours required to fulfil these 24 hour  periods is only calculated while the system is in the disarmed state  Every time the system is  armed in the AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 the sensor watch timer pauses  calculating  The sensor watch timer will continue calculating the next time the system has  been disarmed     If the sensor watch time is programmed for two days in a situation where a premises is armed  for twelve hours and disarmed for twelve hours each day  it will take four days before a zone  can register as a faulty sensor watch zone     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Zone Information    169    Keyswitch Zone Options    When you select a zone to be a keyswitch input  then the following table relates to the options  available to that keyswitch zone  These keyswitch zone options replace Zone Options   only  for the zones that have been programmed to opera
185. heard on the remote codepad and the AWAY indicator will  illuminate  Exit time will now commence     If horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled  two beeps will be heard from the  horn speaker  If the strobe indications have been enabled  the strobe will flash for 6  seconds to indicate that the system has been armed     Disarming From AWAY Mode    1  Press either the AWAY or STAY button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds     Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the AWAY indicator will  extinguish     If the horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled  one beep will be heard from the  horn speaker  If the strobe indications have been enabled  the strobe will flash for 3  seconds to indicate that the system has been disarmed     Arming In STAY Mode 1    1  Press STAY button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds   Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the STAY indicator will now  illuminate  Exit time will now commence     If the horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled  one two tone beep will be heard  from the horn speaker  If the strobe indications have been enabled  the strobe will flash  for 6 seconds to indicate that the system has been armed     Disarming From STAY Mode 1    1  Press either the AWAY or STAY button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds     Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the STAY indicator will  extinguish     If the horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled  one be
186. ialling    If at any time you wish to cancel domestic dialling for any reason  e g   You are moving house  and do not wish the system to continue calling your work place or mobile phone etc   you may    enter your followed by 2 and the AWAY button  the  stay  button followed by  the 4 and the  Away  button to disable domestic dialling     ASTER             2        SA          Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 MAINS  Digit Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator                             Table 38  Codepad Indicators When Changing Domestic Telephone Numbers    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    96    Digit    ISSUE130    Zone 1  Indicator    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Change Telco Arm Disarm Sequence    This Master Code Function allows you to program the call forward sequence to automatically  operate when you arm the system in AWAY Mode  This feature is only available if your  telecommunication provider has the call forward option available     When arming the system in AWAY Mode  the control panel will automatically dial the  telecommunication exchange to redirect all calls to your mobile phone  pocket pager or  answering service  When activated  your telephone will not ring but outgoing calls may still be  made  Contact your telecommunications provider for more information on call forward  operations     Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Progr
187. ialling  the  maximum number of calls per alarm event is twelve     Acknowledge Domestic Dialling  Once the call has been received  if it is not acknowledged during any of the transmission    pauses by pressing the   button on a touch tone telephone or by using the Phone Controller   CC911   the control panel will continue to send its transmission for a period of 2 minutes  It  will then hang up and commence dialling the next telephone number  If the call is successfully  acknowledged  the control panel will hang up and no further calls will be made for that event     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Domestic Dialling            121    Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting    Programming the control panel for domestic reporting has been made extremely simple by the  use of the Installer s Programming Command 965  Refer to Command 965   Set Up Domestic  Dialling Format on page 37 for more information     How To Set Up The Control Panel For Domestic Dialling    1     Enter Installer s Programming Mode        1 2 3 4 followed by the button    Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     Enter Command 9 6 5 followed by the button     Two beeps will be heard  The control panel has now been set up for Domestic Dialling  Format  Refer to Command 965   Set Up Domestic Dialling Format on page 37 for  more information     Exit Installer s Programming Mode by entering Command 9 6 0 followed by the    button  Two beeps will b
188. ice of Liability    While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document  neither Electronics Design and Manufacturing  Pty Limited nor any of its official representatives shall have any liability to any person or entity with respect to any  liability  loss or damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by the information contained in this book     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited reserves the right to make changes to features and specifications at any  time without prior notification in the interest of ongoing product development and improvement     Table Of Contents                                                                                                                   Introduction 15  Introduction 16  Features 17  Quick Start 18  Zone Defaults 20  Zone Types 20  Programming 21  Programming 22  Programming With The Remote Codepad 23  Programming With The Hand Held Programmer 25  Programming With The Programming Key 27  Programming Option Bits 28  Installer   s Programming Commands 29  Command 958   Enable Disable Zone Status Mode 30  Command 959   Test Programming Key 31  Command 960   Exit Installer s Programming Mode 33  Command 961  Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default Settings 33  Command 962   Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key 34  Command 963   Copy From Programming Key To Control Panel 35  Command 964   Erase Programming Key 36  Command 965   Set Up Domestic Dialling Format 37  Command 96
189. ime each day in  AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1     This is the button on your codepad used to execute any given command   Is the mode used to arm your system when you leave your premises     The codepad allows you to perform all functions such as arming  disarming and programming of  your alarm system     Day alarm allows a combination of zones to be monitored while the system is in the disarmed  state     Are devices connected to your alarm system used to cause an alarm condition  Some common  forms of detection devices are  passive infrared  smoke  photo electric beams  reed switches and    vibration sensors     Is a device that is used for communicating to a monitoring station  mobile phone or pocket pager  etc     Is when your system is in a state that will not accept alarms except for 24 hour zones    Dual reporting allows your control panel to transmit alarm signals in two different reporting  formats  EG  The control panel may transmit to a monitoring station as well as a mobile phone etc  or even to two different monitoring stations     Is a feature used to monitor and test the condition of your backup battery    Is a self contained siren unit complete with flashing blue strobe light and a backup battery  It    offers a higher level of security for your alarm system     Is the time allowed after entering your premises  to disarm your system before an alarm occurs     Is the beeping from your codepad during entry time to remind you to disarm your system     Electronics Desi
190. ing The Date and Time 104  Walk Test Mode 105  Event Memory Recall Mode 106  Reserved 106   Hold Down Functions 107  Arm The System In AWAY Mode 107  Arm The System In STAY Mode 1 107  Arm The System In STAY Mode 2 107  Horn Speaker Test 107  Bell Test 108  Strobe Test 108  Turning Day Alarm On and Off 108  Fault Analysis Mode 109  Initiate A Modem Call 109  Reset Latching Outputs 109  Codepad Buzzer Tone Change 110  Send Test Report 110   Remote System 111  Operations Via Telephone 111  Remote Arming Via The Telephone 112  Alarm Link Operations 113  Alarm Link Software 114  Remote Connect 114  Remote Connect With Customer Control 114  Remote Connect Without Call Back Verification 115  Remote Connect With Call Back Verification 115   Direct Connect 116   Alarm Link Options 117  Enable Upload Download Via Alarm Link 117   Enable Alarm Link Call Back 117  Terminate Alarm Link Connection On Alarm 117   Use External Modem Module  CC811  For Alarm Link Operations 117  Domestic Dialling 119  Domestic Dialling Format 120  Domestic Dialling Function 120  Acknowledge Domestic Dialling 120  Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting 121  Disable Domestic Dialling 122  Dialler Reporting Formats 123  Transmission Formats 124  Contact ID Format 124  Point ID Codes 125   4 2 Reporting Format 126  Basic Pager Reporting Format 127  Basic Pager Display Information 128  Subscriber ID Number 128  Zone Status 128  System Status 128                                                              
191. ions 3     System Options 4    Consumer Options 1    Consumer Options 2    Consumer Options 3      Hadio Input Options    214    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Programming Option Bits    ISSUE130    Example    When programming these locations  you will notice that there are four options per location   You may select one  two  three or all four of these options  however  only one number needs to  be programmed  This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together   Program a seven  7  if you require options 1  2 and 4 simultaneously  i e  1 2   4   7      If at  LOCATION 424  you want options 1  2 and 4  add the numbers together and the total is    the number to be programmed  In this example  the number to be programmed is 7  i e  1   2   4 7      Description    EDM Smart Lockout Allowed    Horn Speaker Monitor       Strobe Indication For Radio Arm Disarm    Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Arm Disarm       Table 122  Example   Programming Option Bits    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System and Consumer Options 215    System Options 1    LOCATION 424 1    Description    EDM Smart Lockout Allowed    Horn Speaker Monitor  Strobe Indications For Radio Arm Disarm    Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Arm Disarm       Table 123  System Options 1    EDM Smart Lockout Allowed      This feature allows the control panel to remove any zones that are programmed for lockout  dialler from the lockout list while the sirens are running  This feature allows a 
192. ions will be ignored  Refer to Changing Domestic Phone   f Numbers on page 78 when using the Installer Code function and Changing Domestic  Phone Numbers on page 94 when using the Master Code function     Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1  LOCATION 016   031 0000000000000000    Refer to the Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 for programming information     When Receiver 1 has been set up for domestic reporting  telephone numbers    programmed into these locations will be ignored  Refer to Changing Domestic Phone  Numbers on page 78 when using the Installer Code function and Changing Domestic  Phone Numbers on page 94 when using the Master Code function     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    132 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Handshake Tone For Receiver 1    LOCATION 032 l    This location sets the type of handshake tone required for receiver 1 before data transmissions  to the monitoring station will begin     1  HI LO Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate in  Contact ID Format or High Speed DTMF     2  1400 Hz Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate  in Ademco Lo Speed Format or Domestic Dialling Format     3  Reserved   4  No Handshake Tone is not recommended   5  Pager Handshake Tone is required when the control panel needs to communicate in    Basic Pager Format     Option Handshake Tone Option Handshake Tone    HI LO Handshake    1400 Hz Lo Speed    Table 54 
193. ire Report     Location 341 3420        Page 181  Codepad Medical Report                343                 182  Codepad Reporting Options 0   No Report             1   Receiver 1   2   Receiver 2   4   Receiver 1   2   8   Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails         ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Solution 862 Programming Sheets 251    Location 344     345 Page 182  System Status     Fuse Fail Report  Location 346    347 00000000        Page 182  System Status     Fuse Fail Restore Report 70 8   Location 348   349     000000000  Page 183   System Status     AC Fail Report 01 2    Location 850   351 O                    Page 183   System Status   AC Fail Restore Report  Location352   358      Page 184  System Status   Low Battery Report     Location 354 355 2s c E Page 185  System Status   Low Battery Restore Report EL  Location356   358 EEE    Page 185  System Status     Access Denied          336 coce Neles     Location 357 Reporting Code     Tens Digit nar   Location 358 Reporting Code     Units Digit  Llocalion359        Page 186   H   0   No Report Required   System Status Reporting Options            2   Receiver 2   4   Receiver 1   2   8   Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails  Location 360   366 EEE EE 46 Page 186  Test Reporting Time Location 360 Actual Hour Of The Day  Tens Digit    Location 361 Actual Hour Of The Day  Units Digit    Location 362 Actual Minute Of The Day  Tens Digit    Location 363 Actual Minute Of The Day  Units Digi
194. is in the sealed state     Alarm  This indicates that the corresponding zone is unsealed and in alarm  condition     Zone Bypassed  2 This indicates that a system operator has manually isolated the    corresponding zone  Refer to Isolating Zones on page 60 for information  on how to manually isolate a zone s  prior to arming the system Refer to  Zone Status     Bypass Reports on page 176 for more information    Zone Trouble  Software Version 1 02    This indicates that a zone was left unsealed after the end of exit time   Refer to Zone Status     Trouble Reports on page 177 for more  information     Table 52  Zone Status Display Descriptions    System Status    The system status information is divided up into 4 digits  The first digit of the system status  display indicates whether the system is armed or disarmed  8   Disarmed   9   Armed      The second digit on the system status display indicates which codepad alarm was triggered by  the operator  0   No Codepad Alarm   1   Codepad Panic or Duress   2   Codepad Fire Alarm         Codepad Medical Alarm   Refer to Figure 3  CP5 LED Codepad Showing Audible Alarm  Buttons on page 59 for more information     The third digit on the system status display indicates when the AC mains supply has failed  0    AC mains supply is normal   1   AC mains supply has failed or disconnected      The fourth digit on the system status display indicates when a system fault has occurred at the  control panel  0   System Normal     There is no fau
195. it our telephone  network     There are control panels on the market that after making a few call attempts which fail simply  hang up and wait for ninety seconds or so  in an attempt to clear the jamming incoming call   This may work in some instances where the caller is not a genuine burglar and is not  deliberately trying to jam the control panel  With this simple method of hanging up for ninety  seconds we have not only delayed the alarm signal for this time but also the time taken for the  original failed call attempts which could easily total 4 minutes  This is bad enough in its own  right but even more disturbing is the fact that the initial failed call attempts allow for the  establishment of an audio connection between the would be burglar and the control panel   Anyone with a little knowledge of alarm systems will be able to actually trick the dialler into  thinking it is talking to a base station thus actually clearing the alarm signal  Pretty frightening  when you thought the control panel you were using and recommending to your customers is  supposed to have anti jamming     At Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited we take anti jamming very seriously  and have in fact devoted a great deal of time and money researching this problem  Our  engineers have come up with the best possible anti jamming procedure known and patented  accordingly  Patent Number 571994      Our procedure is very simple and effective because we never answer the burglar   s phone cal
196. l  and the Telecom Network will automatically clear an unanswered call in approximately ninety  seconds  This time will be even shorter if the call is originated through the Mobile Net  Network where it will most likely be in the case of a true burglary     Once the control panel detects that the phone line has stopped ringing it immediately loops the  line and makes its call therefore transmitting its alarm message successfully  The line is also  automatically disconnected from the telephones within the protected premises immediately on  an alarm condition by the control panel to further confuse the burglar and eliminate the  possibility of the burglar answering the call  As you can see  our method of anti jamming will  in the worst possible case delay the alarm signal by ninety seconds but even more importantly  will never allow for an audio connection between the burglar and the control panel     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Appendices    Appendix B    239    All dialling products produced by Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited have  incorporated this true anti jamming feature as standard since 1985 and we do not consider it as  an option but a must in any professional security system     True anti jamming can only be found in products produced by Electronics Design and  Manufacturing Pty Limited and any other manufacturer can only offer second best due to our  patent on this very unique and effective procedure     Test Reports Only When
197. l Panel Memory To Programming Key    This command is used to copy the control panel memory to the programming key  Only the  Programming Key  CC891  may be used with the Solut ion 862 control panel     How To Copy The Control Panel Memory To The Programming Key    1     Enter Installer s Programming Mode  i e  1 2 3 4 followed by the   button     Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash on the  remote codepad to indicate that you have entered Installer   s Programming Mode  You  will also notice that the remote codepad will display the data currently programmed in     LOCATION 000        Plug the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control  panel found at the top of the PCB  printed circuit board  next to the Auxiliary Module  socket     Enter command 9 6 2 followed by the   button    Two beeps will be heard after the control panel memory has successfully been copied  into the programming key  If you heard a long beep after issuing this command  the  programming key has become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt  data  Refer to Command 964   Erase Programming Key on page 36 for more  information     Before removing the programming key from the control panel  enter command    9 6 O followed by the   button to exit Installer s Programming Mode  The STAY  and AWAY indicators will now extinguish on the remote codepad to indicate that the  system has returned to the disarmed state     Failing to exit I
198. ler Options    This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1  You can select each zone to report  on receiver 1  receiver 2  both receiver 1 and receiver 2  receiver 2 only when receiver   fails  or no reporting at all  Select the required dialler option from the table below     Option Description  No Report Required    Receiver 1    Receiver   and Receiver 2  Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails    Table 71  Zone Dialler Options                    d    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    162 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Solution 862 Zones Defaults    LOCATION 267   322    Zone 3 Location 281   287                Lone 6 Location 302 308    000060080    Lone  Location 267   273    BOOZE  one 4 Location 288   294                            7 Location 309   315      000000          N    Zone 2 Location 274   280  rojo        Zone 5 Location 295     301  BOOZE  Zone 8 Location 316   322                      LJ                Lone Zone Pulse Zone Pulse Zone Lone Report Dialler  Type Count Count Time Option 1 Option 2 Code Options    LJ    Zones       6 may be programmed as any zone type  whereas zones 7 and 8 may only be  programmed to any 24 hour zone type     Zone               There are sixteen different zone types to choose from  Refer to the table below for the different  zone types available     Lone Type Description Zone Type    Description      8   24 Hour Hold Up      1          9 2t How Tamper                              
199. lised equipment  This memory is laid out in numerous locations  each of which holds the  data for a specific function     15 is the maximum value that can be programmed into any location     In general  the entire programming sequence will consist of nominating the required location  number and then enter or change the current data  You will repeat this procedure until all the  data has been programmed to suit your requirements  The factory default settings have been  selected for reporting to the monitoring station in the Contact ID Format    The Installers Code only gives access to the Installer s Programming Mode and does NOT arm  and disarm the system  Installer   s Programming Mode can not be entered when the system is  armed  or at any time during siren run time     Programming of the Solut ion 862 control panel can be carried out via any of the following  three methods     e Remote Codepad  e Hand Held Programmer  CC8 14     e Alarm Link Upload Download Software  CC8 16     Example    LOCATION 000   015 0000000000000000    LOCATION 000 LOCATION 004 LOCATION 015    LOCATION 001    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programming    23    Programming With The Remote Codepad    Example    When programming the control panel via the remote codepad  the system must be in the  disarmed state with no alarm memory present     To access the Installer   s Programming Mode  enter the four digit  INSTALLER CODE  followed by    the  away  button  The factory 
200. listed below     Arm The System In AWAY Mode    Holding the   button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in AWAY Mode     Option 2 in  LOCATION 429  on page 220 will need to be enabled for this hold down  function to operate     Arm The System In STAY Mode 1       Holding the   button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in STAY Mode 1   Option 2 in  LOCATION 429  on page 220 will need to be enabled for this hold down  function to operate     If there has not been an alarm during the armed cycle  holding the   button down a second  time will disarm the system from STAY Mode 1  If you require single button disarming from  STAY Mode 1 using this hold down function  Option 4 in  LOCATION 429  on page 220 will  need to be enabled     If an alarm has occurred or entry warning has triggered  a valid user code will need to be used  to disarm the system     Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 161 for information on programming each zone to be  automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1     Arm The System In STAY Mode 2       Holding the    button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in STAY Mode 2   Option 2 in  LOCATION 429  on page 220 will need to be enabled for this function to  operate     If there has not been an alarm during the armed cycle  holding the    button down a second  time will disarm the system from STAY Mode 2  If you require single button disarming from  STAY Mode 2 using this hold down function  Option 4 in  LOCATION 429  on page
201. ll Back Verification    Remote connect with call back verification offers the highest degree of data security by  incorporating a two level security check     The first is the Installer Code combined with the Subscriber ID Number needs to match that of  the control panel  Secondly  the control panel will call back the programmed call back  telephone number to establish the valid connection  The  Call Back Telephone Number  is the  telephone line that the modem and computer has been connected to      LOCATION 159   174  on page 139 must be programmed with the Call Back Telephone    Number and both Option 1 and Option 2 in  LOCATION 180  on page 117 148 will need to  be enabled     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    116    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Direct Connect    The direct connect feature has been incorporated giving the installer a simple method for  programming the Solut ion 862 control panel at the office or on site visits using a portable  computer  There is no need for telephone lines or modems that makes programming of the  control panel completed easily in minutes     All that is required is the Direct Link Cable  CC808  connected to the correct serial port on  your IBM or compatible computer and the other end to the auxiliary module socket on the  control panel     When using the direct connect method of connecting to the control panel  Option 1 in     LOCATION 180    on page 117 148 does not require to be enabled  The
202. ltered  sssm                       wes          ssspy           Table 50  4   2 Reporting Format       Code Description Code Description      ms  see em   R mtm   DEDE T eee   Lm    Digit   st      0323 bu Restore Code 1    v AR Restore Code 2          e              a ee        Table 51  4   2 Transmission Code Descriptions       Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Dialler Reporting Formats    127    Basic Pager Reporting Format    Basic Pager Format requires some interpretation of the numbers that appear on the display   however  it is possible to differentiate between 1000 different control panels when a number of  control panels are reporting to the one pager     How To Setup Receiver   For Basic Pager Reporting    1   LOCATION 000   015  on page 131 requires the Basic Pager s access telephone  number programmed     2     LOCATION 034     039  on page 133 requires a Subscriber ID Number programmed   3   LOCATION 032  on page 132 requires  Option 5   Pager Handshake  to be selected     4   LOCATION 033  on page 133 requires  Option 5   Basic Pager Format  to be  selected     How To Setup Receiver 2 For Basic Pager Reporting    1   LOCATION 040   055  on page 134 requires the Basic Pager s access telephone  number programmed     2     LOCATION 074     079  on page 136 requires a Subscriber ID Number programmed   3   LOCATION 072  on page 135 requires  Option 5   Pager Handshake  to be selected     4   LOCATION 073  on page 136 requires  Option 5   Basic Page
203. lts   1   System Fault     There is a fault  registered by the control panel   Refer to Fault Analysis Mode on page 63 for more  information     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited       Dialler Information    This section includes the following     Dialler Information   Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1  Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1  Handshake Tone For Receiver 1  Transmission Format For Receiver 1  Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1  Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2  Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2  Handshake Tone For Receiver 2  Transmission Format For Receiver 2  Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2   Dialling Format   Telco Arming Sequence   Telco Disarming Sequence   Call Back Telephone Number   Ring Count    Telephone Line Fault Options    130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Dialler Information    ISSUE130    Example    Example    Example    This section outlines the programming information required for the Solut ion 862 control  panel when communicating with base station receivers  Typically these parameters specify the  telephone numbers to call  the transmission formats  handshake tones and transmission speeds     The control panel has the ability to report event information from two on board diallers  The  first dialler reports to Receiver 1 and the second dialler reports to Receiver 2  Each dialler has  the ability to be programmed with two separate telephone numbers  handshake tone  reporting  format type an
204. ly If Previous Alarm 146  Open Close Reports For STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 146  Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete 146  Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30   55 Seconds 146  Dialler Options 3 147  Set DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Second 147  Reserved 147  Change Decadic Dialling To 60 40 147  Reserved 147  Alarm Link Options 148  Upload Download Allowed 148   Call Back Phone Number Required For Upload Download 148  Terminate Upload Download On Alarm 148  External Modem Module  CC811  Required For Upload Download 148  User Codes 149  Access Codes 150  Installer Code 150  User Codes 151  User Codes 152  User Code Priority 153          Zone Information 155                                                                                                                                                                               Day Alarm Zones 156  Day Alarm Resetting 156  Day Alarm Latching 156   Day Alarm Operation 157   EOL Resistor Value 158   Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using N C Contacts 159   Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using N O Contacts 160   Zone Programming 161   Zone Operating Information 161   Zone Options 161   Zone Reporting Information 161   Solution 862 Zones Defaults 162   Zone Types 162  Instant Zone 162  Handover Zone 162  Delay 1 Zone 163  Delay 2 Zone 163  Reserved 163  Reserved 163  24 Hour Medical 163  24 Hour Panic 163  24 Hour Hold Up 163  24 Hour Tamper 163  Reserved 163  Keyswitch Zone 164  24 Hour Burglary Zone 164  24 Ho
205. ly restores     24 Hour Tamper    A 24 Hour Tamper zone  Contact ID Event Code 137  is always ready to trigger the dialler   horn speaker  bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed  state  A 24 Hour Tamper zone will not send a restore report until the zone actually restores     Reserved    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    164    ISSUE130    12    13    14    15    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Keyswitch Zone    A Keyswitch zone is used when you need to connect a keyswitch to operate the system  Refer  to Keyswitch Zone Options on page 169 for selecting options such as momentary  toggle etc   User code number 16 will be reported when arming and disarming using this method of  operation  Programming the polarity level of user code 16 will also effect the operation of the  keyswitch zone  Refer to User Code Priority on page 153 for more information     24 Hour Burglary Zone    A 24 Hour Burglary zone  Contact ID Event Code 133  is always ready to trigger the dialler   horn speaker  bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed  state  A 24 Hour Burglary zone will not send a restore report until the zone actually restores     24 Hour Fire Zone    A 24 Hour Fire zone  Contact ID Event Code 110  is always ready to trigger the dialler  horn  speaker  bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state  A  distinct fire sound is emitted through the horn s
206. m  LOCATION 325   326   on page 176 as zeros     Forced Arming Allowed    If this option has been selected  it will allow the system to be armed with the zone unsealed  If  this option is not selected  the system will not allow the user code holder to arm the system  until the zone in question has been sealed or manually isolated  Refer to Isolating Zones on  page 60 for more information     Lone Restore Report    If this option bit has been selected  the zone will send restore reports as soon as the zone has  restored  If this option bit has not been selected  the zone will not send restore reports after the  zone has restored     If a non 24 hour zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed  the system will    automatically send a zone restore report for that zone  All 24 hour zone types will only send a  Zone restore report at the time the zone has restored     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    172    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual  Zone Reporting Information    Zone Report Code    If you wish the control panel to transmit zone alarm reports  this location should be  programmed as 1  If you do not wish to transmit zone alarm reports  this location should be  programmed as a 0     Zone Dialler Options    This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1  You can select each zone to report  on receiver 1  receiver 2  both receiver 1 and receiver 2  receiver 2 only when receiver   fails  or no reporting at all  
207. m In STAY Mode 1    107  Arm In STAY Mode 2                    eee 107  Bell Testi er eae REPRE eR 108  Codepad Buzzer Tone Change                                 110  Fault Analysis Mode                          eee 109  Horn Speaker                                              107  Initiate Modem Call                            eese 109  Reset Latching Outputs                    seen 109  Send Test Report riiseni orenen rni 110  Strobe  Test    cetero eren 108  Turning Day Alarm                                                 108  Horn Speaker    sce Rees 64  Mono carr RERO PIRE RR 215  TS ee ERE ERREUR               107  I  Installer Code    tete ed ERR 150  Installer Code Function  Change Telco Arm Disarm Sequence                  80  96  Changing Domestic Phone Numbers                          78  Event Memory Recall                            sese 88  Satellite Siren Service                                               86  Set First Test Reports                                      77  Setting STAY Mode 2                                        85  101  Telephone Monitor Mode                             sss 87  Walk Test             87  Installer s Programming Commands  958   Enable Disable Zone Status                              30  959   Test Programming                                            31  960   Exit Installer s Programming Mode                   33    961   Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default  33  962   Copy Panel Memory To Programming            
208. meanings    If no telco disarming sequence has been programmed  a further two beeps will be heard    after entering this mode  These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the  call forward sequence has been displayed     Enter  stay  6 1  stay 2 and the LAWAY  button     Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state     SESE  3     2   paw    wp 6 l sm 2   m       How To Disable The Telco Disarming Sequence    If at any time you wish to cancel the telco disarming sequence  you may enter your     MASTER cope  followed by    and the button  followed by 2 and the button     then the button followed by the 4 and the button        WASTER            3    Rw   2   fom       ST    4           Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions 99    How To Program Telco Arming Sequence   Easy Call Forward  Immediate On     1  Enter your followed by           the  AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     2  Press button   followed by the  away  button to change the telco arming sequence   Three beeps will be heard     If a previous call forwarding sequence has already been programmed  the sequence will  be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators  Refer to    Table 39   Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence    on page 96 for the  indicators and their meanings     If there is no call forward sequence programmed  a further two bee
209. mers 203   System Event Timers 204  Programming Entry Exit Timers 204  Entry Timer 1 204  Entry Timer 2 204  Exit Time 205  Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode 205  Delay Alarm Reporting Time 205  Sensor Watch Time 206       Codepad Lockout Time 206                                                                                                                                                                   Siren Run Time 207  Siren Sound Rate 207  Auto Arming Pre Alert Timer 208  Auto Arming Time 208  Auto Disarming Time 209  Kiss Off Wait Time 209  Reserved 209  System Time 210  System Date 211  Setting The Date and Time 211  System and Consumer Options 213  Programming Option Bits 214  System Options 1 215  EDM Smart Lockout Allowed 215  Horn Speaker Monitor 215  Strobe Indications For Radio Arm Disarm 215  Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Arm Disarm 215  System Options 2 216  Codepad Panic To Be Silent 216  Codepad Fire To Be Silent 216  Codepad Medical To Be Silent 216  Access Denied  Code Retries  To Be Silent 216  System Options 3 217  AC Fail After 1 Hour  Disabled   After 2 Minutes  217  Ignore AC Fail 217  Zone Pulse Count Handover 217  Handover Delay To Be Sequential 217  System Options 4 218  Panel To Power Up Disarmed 218  Arm Disarm Tracking On Power Up 218  Internal Crystal To Keep Time 218  Keyswitch Interface  Night Arm Station Or RE005 Installed 218  Consumer Options 1 219  Test Reports Only When Armed 219   Test Report After Siren Reset 219  Auto Arm In STAY Mode 
210. monitoring  station to receive zone alarm reports from previously locked out zones during siren time  Refer  to Zone Options   on page 167 for information on programming zones for lockout dialler and  lockout siren     Refer to Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler on page 174 to program the number of times the  zone can report before being locked out     Horn Speaker Monitor    2 If this option has been selected  the control panel will detect when the horn speaker has been  disconnected from the speaker terminals  The FAULT indicator will illuminate when the horn  speaker has been disconnected and will extinguish when the horn speaker has been  reconnected  If an output is required to operate when the horn speaker has been disconnected   refer to Output Event Type     Horn Speaker Monitor Fail on page 194 for more information     Strobe Indications For Radio Arm Disarm    4 This option will allow the strobe to indicate when the system is armed and disarmed when  remotely operating the system via the Solution Wireless On Off Interface  WE800      No Of Seconds System Status    System Disarmed    System Armed In AWAY Mode  System Armed In STAY Mode 1    Table 124  Strobe Indications For Remote Operations       Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Arm Disarm    8 This option will allow the horn speaker to indicate when the system is armed and disarmed  when remotely operating the system via the Solution Wireless On Off Interface  WE800      No Of Beeps System Status    System Disarmed    
211. mory unless the Installer s  Programming Mode has been entered first  If this occurs  then the control panel will  need to be returned to Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited where a service  fee will be charged to unlock the control panel s memory     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    28 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Programming Option Bits    When programming these locations  you will notice that there are four alternatives per location   You may select one  two  three or all of these alternatives for each location  however  only one  number is required to be programmed  This number is calculated by adding the option bit  numbers together     Example  If at  LOCATION 177  you want options 1  2 and 4  add the numbers together and the total is    the number to be programmed  In this example  the number to be programmed is 7  i e  1   2   4 7      Option Description    Enabled   Allow Dialler Reporting Functions  Disabled   Disable All Dialler Reporting Functions    Enable Remote Arming Via The Telephone    Enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed    Enabled   Use Bell 103 For FSK Format  Disabled   CCITT V21 Format    Table 4  Example   Programming Option Bits       ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programming 29    Installer s Programming Commands    There are ten different commands that can be used to perform various functions once the  Installer s Programming Mode has been entered  To issue the
212. n    124 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Transmission Formats    When making use of the control panel s dialling and communication features  there are a  number of transmission formats available  Refer to  LOCATION 033  on page 133 to set the  required transmission format for Receiver 1 and    LOCATION 073    on page 136 to set the  required transmission formation for Receiver 2  The Solution 862 control panel comes  factory default to report in the Contact ID Format     Contact  D Format    This format can identify hundreds of protection zones by their unique code and provides a  single digit event qualifier and a three digit event code that quickly identifies the condition  being reported     Subscriber Group Point ID  ID Number Qualifier Number Number    Four Digit Event Qualifier  Which Gives Event Code Group Number Point ID Number  Subscriber ID Specific Event Information   Made Up Of 3  Made Up Of 2  Made Up Of 3  Number 1   New Event Or Opening Hex Digits  Hex Digits  Hex Digits   3   New Restore Or Closing       Table 46  Contact ID Format Breakdown    In general  Contact ID reporting format is very simple as most of the Event Codes and Point ID  Codes have been predefined  The base station software usually only has the ability to identify  a zone going into alarm by its Point ID Code and usually pays little attention to the Event  Code     Refer to  Table 47  Point ID Codes  on page 125 for further information on the Solut ion  862 Point ID Codes     ISSUE130 Ele
213. n  When the number of incorrect code attempts equals the number programmed  in this location  the system will carry out the following     1  Activate the sirens  internal screamers and strobes connected to the control panel  Refer  to Option 8 in    LOCATION 425    on page 216 if you require access denied to be silent     2  Shutdown all codepads that are connected to the control panel and lock them out for the  time period programmed in    LOCATION 410    on page 206     3  Transmit an    Access Denied     Contact ID Event Code 421  report to the base station  receiver     Each time the system is armed or disarmed  the counter will be reset  The number of attempts  can be anywhere between 1 15  If you program a zero into    LOCATION 356     the code  attempts are unlimited and neither of the three points listed above will take place  This  function works when the system is in the armed or disarmed state     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    186 Solution 862 Installation Manual    System Status Reporting Options    LOCATION 359 1    Option Description    No Report Required    2 Receiver 2    Receiver   and Receiver 2    8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails    Table 98  System Status Reporting Options Location       This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1  You can select whether the system  status reporting options will report on receiver 1  receiver 2  both receiver 1 and receiver 2   receiver 2 only when receiver   fails or
214. n 862 control panel for your installation  So that  you can obtain the most from your unit  we suggest that you take the time to read through this  manual and familiarise yourself with the numerous outstanding operating and installation  features of this system     You will notice that in all aspects of planning  engineering  styling  operation  convenience and  adaptability  we have sought to anticipate your every possible requirement  Programming  simplicity and speed have been some of the major considerations and we believe that our  objectives in this area have been more than satisfied     This installation manual will explain all aspects of programming the Solut ion 862 control  panel from factory default to final commissioning       system parameters and options are  detailed  however  suitability is left up to the individual  Every control panel can be tailored to  meet all requirements quickly and easily         programming simplicity will make your  installation quick  accurate and rewarding each and every time     The Solution range of control panels are very popular amongst thousands of people  throughout many countries of the world  all who have various levels of technical aptitude and  ability  We have tried to aim this installation manual to all levels of readers     As the Solution control panels continue to be improved over the years  they have become    very powerful  Some of its early first time users have advanced to true  power users  and we  need to addre
215. n the second telephone number and the third telephone     WASTER CODE   2    sn                   PHONE No 1     5          4    PHONE No  2     away     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    122    ISSUE130    Example                    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program    EE NES Hb ME E Ri   Followed        03 B   Fottowea By 2       __  Four Second Pause     Followed By 3    Followed By 4       Table 45  Domestic Dialling Digits    If you wish to program two separate telephone numbers  9672 1777 and 9672 1233   follow  the sequence below and replace the telephone numbers mentioned in the manual with the  telephone numbers that you wish to program     2580  2   Aw   96721777   5    4   96721233       Disable Domestic Dialling    If at any time you wish to cancel domestic dialling for any reason  e g   You are moving house  and do not wish the system to continue calling your work place or mobile phone etc   you may    enter your  MASTER cope  followed by 2 and the button  the button followed by  the 4 and the button to disable domestic dialling     ASTER             2          ST                        Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Dialler Reporting Formats       This section includes the following           Transmission Formats     Contact ID Format       Point ID Codes     4 2 Reporting Format      Basic Pager Reporting Format      Basic Pager Display Informatio
216. nd Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programmable Outputs    201    Timing Of Outputs    The timing of outputs is calculated by the time base and a multiplier  These two values play  different roles depending on the polarity selected  When programming outputs to pulse  both  the  On  and  Off  times can be set  One shot polarities can be programmed to operate  between 200 ms up to 99 hours in duration        LL     Time Multiplier  Base Tens   Units    The maximum value that can be programmed in the two multiplier locations is 9 9       1 Minute  60 Seconds     4   1 Hour  60 Minutes     Table 103  Time Base Settings       The time base settings can be set to only one of the values listed in  Table 103  Time Base  Settings   The multiplier value is a two digit decimal number from 00 99  For greater  accuracy  use 60 seconds for 1 minute intervals and use 60 minutes for one hour intervals     Pulsing Polarities    When calculating pulsing polarities both the  On  and  Off  times need to be programmed   The duration or  On  time of an output is determined by selecting only one of the time base  options from  Table 103  Time Base Settings   This means there are only four  On  times to  choose from     The  Off  time is calculated as a multiple of the  On  time by choosing a decimal number    between 00 and 99  If an output is required to operate for 200 ms every five seconds  program  the time settings as follows       pr     On Time Off Time    ON Time OFF Time Increments Tolerance 
217. nd the control panel will not synchronise     Remote Connect    The remote connect feature allows you to establish a connection through the telephone network  from your IBM or compatible computer to the Solut ion 862 control panel anywhere in the  country where a telephone line is present  The advantages of this are very obvious and having  this facility will allow you to offer faster service to your clients     Remote Connect With Customer Control    If you wish to configure the control panel so that a remote connection can only be established  when the client initiates it through the remote codepad  you will need to program the following  information      LOCATION 159   174  on page 139 will need to have the Call Back Telephone Number  programmed and Option 1 in  LOCATION 180  on page 117 148 will need to be disabled   The control panel has now been set so that the client has control of when a remote connection  can be established     To activate the control panel to dial the remote computer to establish a link  hold the    button  down until two beeps are heard on the remote codepad     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Alarm Link Operations    115    Remote Connect Without Call Back Verification    Remote connect without call back verification can be handy where you have a need to perform  Upload Download functions from multiple locations     There are two methods that you may program so that the call back verification is disabled  It  should be noted th
218. nding ZONE indicator will illuminate  Refer  to    Table 23  Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers    on page  70     3  Press the LSTAYJ button to delete the user code   Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish     If you wish to delete any further remote radio user codes  repeat this procedure as many  times as required      WASTER             1    ave      USER NUMBER    AWAY    STAY                     When deleting remote radio user codes  this function will automatically terminate if a    button is not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the  Away  button  One long  beep indicates the an incorrect user number has been selected     User Zone   Zone2  Zone3  Zone4  Zone5 JZone6  Zone7  Zone8 MAINS  No Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator         _      l  L     z           ur   pq    j  j  j      v  im   qz      j  j  J     J     ml   qv  j  j  j      v    ale  na         as                   i    Table 23  Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Remote Radio Transmitter Operations 71       Figure 4  2 Button    Hand Held Transmitter     RE012     2 Channel Radio Remote Hand Held Transmitter Operations    All operations via the 2 button radio remote hand held transmitter are fixed once the control  panel has been taught the hand held transmitters code  Therefore  there is no programming  requi
219. ne long beep indicates     an incorrect user number has been selected     User Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8  No Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator       Table 35  Codepad Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers    Example  If you wish to delete user code number 3  follow the steps outlined below and remember to  substitute the default Master Code  2580  with the Master Code that has been programmed          2580  1  a       3        Sw     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    92    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Changing and Deleting Remote Radio User Codes    This function allows a Master Code holder to add change or delete any of the system user    codes     How To Add Or Change A Remote Radio User Code    1     Enter your  MASTER cope  followed by 1 and the  away  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     Enter the  USER NUMBER   9 16  that you wish to change followed by the  AWAY button     Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate   Refer to  Table 36  Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers  on  page 93      T       Now press any of the RANSMIT   buttons on the hand held transmitter   Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish     If you wish to change any further user codes  repeat this procedure as many times as  required  
220. nes when your system is armed in STAY Mode  1  These zones can only be programmed by your installer     Is a condition that automatically isolates certain zones when your system is armed in STAY Mode  2  These zones are programmed by the Master Code holder     Telco arming is a feature that automatically diverts your telephone number to another telephone  when the system is armed in AWAY Mode   same as using call forwarding     Telco disarm automatically un diverts your telephone upon disarming your system     Refers to zone status  If a zone is unsealed  the detection devices are violated and the zone  indicator will be illuminated  i e  a reed switch is open or a detector has noted an intrusion      A numerical code that is used to arm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or  STAY Mode 2     A monitored input used to trigger an alarm condition  A zone may be set up only to activate an  alarm when the system is armed or to operate irrespective of the system being armed or disarmed     A monitored input where tamper switches and emergency switches may be connected  If at any    time   whether your system is armed or disarmed  one of these switches is violated  an alarm  condition will be generated     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    234    Solution 862 Wiring Diagram    Solution 862 Installation Manual    E E     25   TELECOM 605 Plug           1   Green  Internal Phone Line  5   Yellow  Internal Phone Line  2       Black  Telecom Line 
221. nformation  A codepad fire alarm  will transmit a Contact ID Event Code 110 to a base station receiver     Figure 3  CP5 LED Codepad  Showing Audible Alarm Buttons         4 6    Codepad Medical Alarm    An audible codepad medical alarm will be triggered when both the 7 and    buttons on the  remote codepad are pressed simultaneously     Refer to Option 4 in  LOCATION 425  on page 216 if you wish to program codepad medical  to be silent  If you wish to disable the reporting of the codepad medical alarm report  refer to       LOCATION 341   342    on page 181 for more information  A codepad medical alarm will  transmit a Contact ID Event Code 100 to a base station receiver          7    9    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    60    Isolating Zones    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Isolating zones allow you to manually disable one or more zones before arming the system in  AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2  Once a zone has been isolated  access is  allowed into that zone during the armed state without activating the sirens or dialler     An example when you may require to isolate a zone before arming in AWAY Mode  STAY  Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 may be when a zone PIR detector may be false alarming or that you  may need to leave a pet inside a particular zone whilst you are away     Isolating zones is performed by one of two methods  One way requires the use of a valid user  code while the other way does not  The ability to isolate zon
222. ng Output 2 ON    1  Press the AUX button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds   Output 2 will now turn on     Turning Output 2 OFF    1  Press the AUX button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds   Output 2 will now turn off     All reset times of the remote DOOR and AUX buttons are in reference to polarity 1 and 8   Reset times will vary depending on the polarity used     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    74 Solution 862 Installation Manual    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions       This section includes the following        Installer Code Functions    Master Code Functions      Hold Down Functions    76 Solution 862 Installation Manual    System Functions    This section explains the more advanced features that are required for testing and regular  maintenance of the system  Features such as Installer Code Functions  Master Code Functions  and Hold Down Functions are covered in this section     Installer Code functions    Installer Code Functions are designed to allow the installer to perform various system tests  without the need to know a Master Code     To enter the required Installer Code function  enter the  INSTALLER CODE  followed by the  required  FUNCTION  digit and the button  All available Installer Code functions are listed    in    Table 25  Installer Code Functions    outlined below     or  INSTALLER COE     FONCTION     ri     These functions can only be carried out when th
223. ng Pty Limited    Dialler Options 147    TAY LG    LOCATION 179 0    Description    Set          Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Second    Reserved    Change Decadic Dialling To 60 40  8 Reserved       Table 66  Dialler Options 3    Set DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Second      If this option is not selected  the dialling format     Australian DTMF dials at the rate of 5 digits  per second  i e  100 ms tone  100 ms pause  100 ms tone  100 ms pause      If this option has been selected  the dialling format     Australian DTMF dials at the rate of 1  digit per second  i e  500 ms tone  500 ms pause      Reserved    Change Decadic Dialling To 60 40    4 Some countries have different requirements for decadic dialling  Setting this option will  change the dialling characteristics from 65 35  Australian Standard  to 60 40  This option  should only be set when the control panel is used in a country that requires decadic dialling as  60 40  This option has no effect when using DTMF tone dialling     Reserved    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    148 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Alarm Link Options    LOCATION 180 B    Description    Upload Download Allowed    Call Back Phone Number Required For Upload Download    Terminate Upload Download On Alarm  External Modem Module  CC811  Required For Upload  Download    Table 67  Alarm Link Options       Upload Download Allowed    1 This option will need to be selected if you require to use the Alarm Link Software 
224. nge                       eee 110  Codepad Duress                   sese 59  180  Codepad Duress Report                         eese 180  Codepad Extinguish Mode                              sess 220  Codepad Fir           eem 59  181  216  Codepad Fire Report                     esee 181  Codepad Fire To Be 511                                                 216  Codepad Indicators  Audible         diee ERIS ener 46  50  AWAY                               etus 44  47                    eas 45  49  MAINS  ede RE heirs 45  48  OFF Indicator Zone Sealed                                       49  ON Indicator Zone In                                                 49  Programming Mode                      see 49  STAY ace duende eS 45  48  System Disarmed            ne ccn eene 48           cce 44  47  Zone Isolating Mode                               eese 48  Codepad Lockout Time                          eese 206  Codepad                                                         59  181  216  Codepad Medical Report                        sese 181  Codepad Medical To Be Silent                                     216  Codepad                                                           59  180 216  Codepad Panic                                                       180  Codepad Panic      Be   1                                                 216  Codepad Reporting                                                      182  Codepads  CP5 Eight Zone LCD                                    
225. ns  during the disarmed state without the need to remember the customers Master Code  Refer to    Installer Code Functions on page 76 for more information     Refer to Programming With The Remote Codepad on page 23 or Programming With The Hand  Held Programmer on page 25 for more information on programming the system     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    User Codes 151    LOCATION 185   264    The purpose of user codes is to arm and disarm the system as well as perform other specific  functions as described in Master Code Functions on page 89     User codes  1 8  can be any length between one to four digits long  Each user code may have  a different priority level multiple user codes may have the same priority level  The priority  level controls the behaviour of the code  allowing it to arm only  arm and disarm or be a Master  Code holder etc  The priority level of each user code is programmed in the last location of    each user code and can only be changed by the installer  A Master Code holder does not have  the ability to change priority levels     D    User Code Priority    There are a total of 16 user codes available that can be changed or deleted at any time by a  Master Code holder  however  user codes 9     16 can only be remote radio user codes  Refer to  Remote Radio Transmitter Operations on page 68 for more information  Multiple Master  Codes can be programmed  Refer to Master Code Functions on page 89 for more information  on adding  d
226. nseal and seal the zones to be tested     The codepad will sound one long beep and the horn speaker will sound one short beep  every time a zone is sealed or unsealed     3  Press the button to exit this function   Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish  The  system has now returned to the disarmed state      RSTALERCODE   7    snis    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130       88    ISSUE130    Example    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Event Memory Recall Mode    This function allows you to playback the last forty events that have occurred to the system   The event memory recall mode reports all alarms and arming disarming of the system in the  AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2  This function helps with trouble shooting  system faults  The events are displayed via the codepad indicators     How To Enter The Event Memory Recall Mode  1  Enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by    and the  AWAY  button     Three beeps will be heard  The events will be played back via the codepad indicators in  reverse chronological order           CODE       wma        If the events were as follows     Event No Event Description    System Armed In AWAY Mode    Alarm In Zone 3  Alarm In Zone 4         System Disarmed    Table 31  Event Memory Recall   Example Events       The event memory playback will report as follows     Event No Codepad Indicator Event Description      4   All Indicators Off Except MAINS System Disarmed    Zone
227. nstaller   s Programming Mode before removing the programming key  may result in corrupting the programming key     How To Copy The Panel Memory To Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer    1     Before connecting the hand held programmer onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING  KEY  make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position  and that no external key has been plugged onto the hand held programmer     Enter Installer s Programming Mode  i e  1 2 3 4 followed by the   button    Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the data currently  programmed in    LOCATION 000        Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held  programmer     Enter command 9 6 2 followed by the   button    Two beeps will be heard after the control panel memory has successfully been copied  into the programming key  If you heard a long beep after issuing this command  the  programming key has become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt  data  Refer to Command 964   Erase Programming Key on page 36 for more  information     Before removing the programming key from the hand held programmer  enter command    9 6 O followed by the   button to exit Installer s Programming Mode  Two beeps  will be heard and the system will now return to the disarmed state     Failing to exit Installer   s Programming Mode before removing the programming key  may result in corrupting the programming key     Electronics
228. o be selected if the answering machine bypass feature is required to operate  only when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2   When the system is disarmed  the control panel will not answer any incoming calls  This  option is beneficial in high telephone traffic installations where the control panel could answer  an incoming call  Refer to Ring Count on page 140 to program answering machine bypass     Use Bell 103 For FSK Format  Disabled     CCITT V21     8 If this option is enabled  the control panel will use the transmission frequency BELL 103 at  300 baud  If this option is disabled  the control panel will use the transmission frequency  CCITT V21 at 300 baud     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    146    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Dialler Options 2    LOCATION 178    ISSUE130    0    Description    Open Close Reports Only If Previous Alarm  Open Close Reports For STAY Mode   and STAY Mode 2    Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete  Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30 To 55 Seconds    Table 65  Dialler Options 2       Open Close Reports Only If Previous Alarm    This option requires Open Close reports in    LOCATION 333   334    to be enabled on page 179  for it to be effective     An opening report will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the system has been  disarmed after an alarm has occurred  When the system has been armed  a closing report will  be transmitted  An opening or closing
229. o disable the reporting of the codepad fire alarm  program    LOCATION 339    340    on page 181 as zero     Codepad Medical To Be Silent    4 If this option has been selected  a codepad medical alarm will not operate the horn speaker  the  bell or the strobe outputs  If this option is not selected  all three outputs will operate after a    codepad fire alarm has been activated when the 7 and    buttons on the remote codepad are  pressed simultaneously  Selecting this option does not effect the operation of the  communication dialler     If you wish to disable the reporting of the codepad medical alarm  program    LOCATION 341    342    on page 181 as zero     Access Denied  Code Retries  To Be Silent    8 If this option has been selected  a codepad tamper alarm will not operate the horn speaker  bell  or the strobe outputs  If this option is not selected  all three outputs will operate after a  codepad tamper alarm has occurred     Refer to  LOCATION 356  on page 185 to set the number of invalid code retries before an  alarm condition occurs  Selecting this option does not effect the operation of the  communication dialler  If you wish to disable the reporting of access denied reports program     LOCATION 357   358    as zero     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System and Consumer Options 217    System Options 3     LOCATION 426    8    Description    AC Fail After 1 Hour  Disabled   After 2 Minutes     Ignore AC Mains Fail Indication    Pulse Co
230. of operation     If the decimal point is illuminated on the hand held programmer  automatic stepping of  locations is active  An automatic increment of the location being programmed will occur as  soon as        button is pressed positioning you at the next location ready for programming    If the decimal point is not illuminated on the hand held programmer  the automatic stepping of  locations is disabled and programming the next location will need to be manually selected by  pressing the   button  As you can see from the examples below  auto step mode can be very    useful when programming successive locations     When programming via the remote codepad  there are no visual indications to display if  automatic stepping of locations has been enabled     How To Enable Automatic Stepping Of locations    1  Enter Installer s Programming Mode  i e  1 2 3 4 followed by the   button    Two beeps will be heard     If you are using the remote codepad  the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash  to indicate that you have entered Installer   s Programming Mode  You will also notice  that the remote codepad will display the data currently programmed in    LOCATION  000        2  Enter command 9 6 6 followed by the   button   Two beeps will be heard     How To Disable Automatic Stepping Of locations    1  Enter command 9 6 6 followed by the   button   Two beeps will be heard      Auto Step Enabled   To enter the Primary Telephone Number  02 pause 9672 1055  with auto step enabled 
231. olut ion 862 control panel you will be able to eliminate five calls per week   This means that over one week you will save your customer  1 25 and over one year you will  save them  65 00     Not a bad saving  and remember these figures are for local calls only     Turning the table slightly  a control room with lets say 1000 customers sending the above  mentioned reports  can expect to receive some 884 000 phone calls   221 000 assuming local  calls  just for reporting opening  closing and test reports over a 12 month period     If you use the Solut ion 862 control panel  you can effectively cut the calls to 624 000 per  year  at a value of  156 000 assuming local calls   a saving of  65 000  If we now assume that  for each call one line is printed on the logging printer  and that one page is filled per 60 calls   You will be able to save 4333 sheets of paper per year and at approximately  45 per box this  becomes a considerable saving     As you can see using the Solut ion 862 control panel will save you money  your customer    money and will help conserve our natural resources  in fact  the only people who don t like this  feature is Telecom     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    240 Solution 862 Installation Manual    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Specifications       This section includes the following        Warranty Statement      Specifications       Software Version Number     Advice To Users      New Zealand T
232. ond  0   15 Sec s   Increments Of 16 Seconds  0   240 Sec s     Location 406     407    i i Location 406  Delay Alarm Reporting Time poses    Increments Of 1 Second  0   15 Sec   s   Increments Of 16 Seconds  0   240 Sec s     Location 408     409    H Location 408  Sensor Watch Time quotus    Increments Of Days  Tens Digit   Increments Of Days  Units Digit     Location 410  Codepad Lockout Time Location 410    Location 411  Siren Run Time Location 411    Location 412  Siren Sound Rate  Slow  lt  Sound  gt  Fast     Location 413  Auto Arming Pre Alert Time               Location 414     417    Auto Arming Time Location 414  Location 415    Location 416  Location 417    Hour Of The Day  Tens Digit   Hour Of The Day  Units Digit   Minute Of The Day  Tens Digit   Minute Of The Day  Units Digit     Location 418     421    Auto Disarming Time Location 418  Location 419    Location 420  Location 421    Hour Of The Day  Tens Digit   Hour Of The Day  Units Digit   Minute Of The Day  Tens Digit   Minute Of The Day  Units Digit     Location 422  Kiss Off Wait Time Location 422    Location 423  Reserved    Increments Of 500 ms  500 ms     8 Sec   s     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited     U    5  Q                        U    5  Q                     Solution 862 Programming Sheets    Location 424  System Options 1    1   EDM Smart Lockout Allowed   2   Horn Speaker Monitor   4   Strobe Indications For Radio Arm Disarm   8   Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Arm Disa
233. one of the detection devices has stopped working or  has failed to detect movement for the time period programmed whilst the system is disarmed   The sensor watch fault will clear after the registered zone has been unsealed and resealed  again     To find out which zone has registered the sensor watch fault  hold down the 5 button whilst  in fault analysis mode to display the zone that has registered the sensor watch fault  Refer to  Sensor Watch Time on page 206 for setting sensor watch time and Zone Options 1 on page 167  for setting zones to be monitored for sensor watch     When reporting to the base station receiver  a  Self Test Fail  report  Contact ID Event Code  307  will be used to indicate the sensor watch fault     Horn Speaker Monitor    A horn speaker monitor fault will register when the horn speaker becomes disconnected from  the control panel  This fault will clear when the horn speaker has been reconnected  Refer to   LOCATION 424  on page 215 to enable monitoring of the horn speaker     Telephone Line Fault    A telephone line fault will register when the telephone line has been disconnected from the  control panel for more than 40 seconds  This fault can only occur if Option 1 in  LOCATION  176  on page 141 has been selected  The fault will clear once the telephone line has been  reconnected for more than 40 seconds     E  Fault    An    gt  fault will register when the control panel detects an internal checksum error  The  control panel will need to be pow
234. one type     Zone Type Description Zone Type Description     0  q Insan       8 2h Hour Hold Up      1   Handover                9   24HouTampr        4 Reserved   12   24HowBuglry      6   24Howr Medic                            14   ChimeOny         Table 134  Available Zone Types    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Solution 862 Programming Sheets 249    Zone Pulse Count Settings    The pulse count settings for each zone can be programmed between 0   15     Zone Pulse Count Time    Zone pulse count time is the time frame or period over which the number of pulses must register     20 ms Loop Response Time 150 ms Loop Response Time  Zone Pulse Count Time Zone Pulse Count Time      0   O5Seod Seconds            1_   ISeod                9   S30Seons    4 2    4 Seconds 1 60 Seconds            90 Seconds  6 10 Seconds 14 120 Seconds    15 Seconds 200 Seconds    Table 135  Zone Pulse Count Time Options    Lone Options 1 Lone Options 2    Option Description Option Description    Lockout Siren Lockout Dialler      4 Silent Alarm         4   Forced Arming Allowed      8   Sensor Watch     8   Enable Zone Restore Report          Table 136  Zone Options 1 Table 137  Zone Options 2       Zone Dialler Options    Option Description    0  No Report                    eon    Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails       Table 138  Zone Dialler Options    Zone Descriptions  Use this table as a reference to indicate what each zone is connected to   Description Desc
235. ones  This feature will prove to be  very useful during installation as the hand held programmer allows you to view the status of  the zones directly at the control panel  saving you time and money     How To Enable Zone Status Mode    1  Enter Installers Programming Mode  i e  1 2 3 4 followed by the   button    Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the data currently  programmed in    LOCATION 000        2  Enter command 9 5 8 followed by the   button   Two beeps will be heard and the number 4 will illuminate to indicate zones 1     4 are  being displayed     How To Disable Zone Status Mode    1  Enter command 9 5 8 followed by the   button   Two beeps will be heard and you will return to the Installer   s Programming Mode              in the display indicates the zone is unsealed   A blank display indicates the zone is sealed     A   4 7   indicates that zone 1 is sealed and zones 2  3 and 4 are unsealed           8    7 indicates that zones 5 and 8 are unsealed and zones 6 and 7 are sealed     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programming    31    Command 959   Test Programming Key    This command initiates a test to be carried out on the programming key  Only the  Programming Key  CC891  may be used with the Solut ion 862 control panel     The programming key test is non destructive and any data in the programming key will remain  intact after the test has been completed  One long beep indicates that the programming key test 
236. ore Code 178  Zone Status Reporting Options 178  Open Close Reports 179  Open Close Reporting Options 179  Codepad Duress Report 180  Codepad Panic Report 180  Codepad Fire Report 181  Codepad Medical Report 181  Codepad Reporting Options 182  System Status     Fuse Fail Report 182  System Status     Fuse Fail Restore Report 182  System Status     AC Fail Report 183  System Status     AC Fail Restore Report 183  System Status   Low Battery Report 184  System Status   Low Battery Restore Report 184  System Status   Access Denied 185   Code Retries 185  System Status Reporting Options 186   Test Reporting Time 187   Test Reporting Dialler Options 187  Programmable Outputs 189   Outputs 190  Output Defaults 190  Default For Strobe 190  Default For Entry Exit 190  Redirecting Outputs To The Codepad Buzzer 191  Output Event Types 192  Output Polarity 199   Output Not Used 199  Normally Open  Going Low 199  Normally Open  Pulsing Low 199  Normally Open  One Shot Low 199  Normally Open  One Shot Low With Retrigger 199  Normally Open  One Shot Low With Reset 199  Normally Open  One Shot Low With Alarm 200  Normally Open  Latching Low 200  Normally Low  Going Open 200  Normally Low  Pulsing Open 200  Normally Low  One Shot Open 200  Normally Low  One Shot Open With Retrigger 200  Normally Low  One Shot Open With Reset 200  Normally Low  One Shot Open With Alarm 200  Normally Low  Latching Open 200  Timing Of Outputs 201  Pulsing Polarities 201  One Shot Polarities 202  System Event Ti
237. ote ce 151  233   Adding Or Changing                      sese 90  92   Deleting ner a RR 91  93   Priority Level    ueneno tente 153  W  Walk Test                                               87  105  Warranty Statement                  sese 242  Wiring Diagram                 sese 234  Y  Year 2000 Compliance    eee cee sees 242  Z  Zone   Default Sx ien Rie 20  162   Dialler Options                     eee 161  172   EOL Resistor Value    ice ette gs 158   Indicators   ect eet ERR eres Ce 44  47   Isolating   Code To Isolate                                 sss 62   Isolating   Standard                        sssss 61   Isolating Allowed                         eere 171   Operating Information                      see 161   Options  T    ee pet 161  167   OptonSs 2  oet        161   Programming    oA ita ette RE        161   Pulse  COUN E                        161  165    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    261  Pulse Count                                                      165  217  Pulse Count Time                       esee 161  166  Report Coders sne                         PRG 161  Reporting Information                             sss 161  172  Restore Code    roce rette RERO 178  Restore                            171                   nm           mme e 30  Tro  bl   itte a e 177  Types ise pee Reb 20  161  162  ZONE  BY Passaic eed bere PIU 176  Zone Options 1  Delay Alarm Reporting                                          167  Lockout Siren  amp
238. output will switch back to open circuit when the event has restored  Time  parameters vary the  On  time of the pulse     Normally Open  One Shot Low    3 This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event  occurs  The output will switch back to open circuit when the time parameter setting has  expired  This one shot time setting will always run its full duration and cannot be manually  reset     Normally Open  One Shot Low With Retrigger    4 This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event  occurs  Every time the event occurs  it will restart the one shot timer  The output will switch  back to open circuit once the one shot time has expired     This polarity is ideally suited for lighting control  A PIR can be used to trigger an output for  turning on lights  While ever there is movement  the PIR will keep re triggering the output and  lengthen the time the lights will remain switched on     Normally Open  One Shot Low With Reset    5 This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event  occurs  The output will switch back to open circuit when the one shot time has expired or  when the event has returned to normal  This means the operation of the output can be  shortened regardless of the time parameter programmed     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    200    ISSUE130    10    12    13    14    Solution 862 Installation Manu
239. owledge The System Fault    1  To acknowledge the system fault  press the button  The FAULT indicator will  remain illuminated and the codepad will cease its once a minute beep     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    64    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Fault Descriptions  Low Battery    A low battery fault will register when the battery supply voltage falls below 10 5 volts or when  a dynamic battery test detects a low capacity battery  This fault will clear after a successful  dynamic battery test  A dynamic battery test is performed every four hours once power has  been connected to the control panel and also every time the system is armed in AWAY Mode   STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2     When reporting to the base station receiver  the control panel will report a    Battery Test  Failure    report  Contact ID Event Code 309  to indicate the low battery fault condition     Date and Time    The date and time fault will register every time the control panel has been powered down  This  type of fault will not cause the FAULT indicator on the codepad to flash unless the Auto  Arming Time on page 208 has been programmed  otherwise  the date and time fault will only  be indicated when entering fault analysis mode  This fault will clear once the date and time has  been programmed  Refer to Setting The Date and Time on page 104 for further information on  setting the date and time     Sensor Watch    A sensor watch fault will register because 
240. pad buzzer  hold the 8 button down continuously   The tone of the buzzer will start to increase in pitch     2  Release the 8 button when the desired tone has been reached      m Every time the system has been powered down  each codepad will need their individual  E tone reset using this function     Send Test Report     Holding the O button down until two beeps are heard will transmit a test report  Contact ID    Event Code 602  that is used to test the dialling and reporting capabilities of the system  without causing the sirens to sound     A test report will not be transmitted if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000  This feature is only  applicable if the control panel has been programmed to report via the telephone     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Remote System    Operations Via Telephone    This section includes the following           Remote Arming Via The Telephone    112    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Remote Arming Via The Telephone    ISSUE130    This feature allows you to arm your system from any remote location via the telephone line   For obvious security reasons  the system cannot be disarmed using this method  To make use  of this feature  you will require a touch tone telephone or the Phone Controller  CC911      How To Remotely Arm Your System Via The Telephone    1  Call the telephone number that your control panel has been connected to     2  When the control panel answers the incoming call  a short jingle will be heard 
241. pe   When you are satisfied that the output is functioning correctly  change the first digit of the  output event type  i e  The tens digit  by adding the value 8     30 Communications Failure  This event will operate when the dialler has made all possible attempts to reach the  base station receiver  The output will reset when the first  Kiss Off  is received   This output event type is not applicable for domestic reporting     To redirect the above output event type to operate a codepad buzzer  program the output event  type as below        Communications Failure  This event will operate when the dialler has made all possible attempts to reach the  base station receiver  The output will reset when the first  Kiss Off  is received   This output event type is not applicable for domestic reporting     The codepad buzzer will now operate instead of the output that has been programmed  The  output is no longer functional and cannot be used for any other output event type     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    192    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Output Event Types    There are approximately seventy five different output event types to choose from  Two  numbers designate each output event type  These two numbers need to be programmed into  the appropriate locations of the output being used to indicate when the output should operate     All reset times are in reference to polarity 1 and 8  Reset times will vary depending on  the polarity
242. peaker to indicate this type of alarm condition   This fire sound is completely different to the burglary sound  A 24 Hour Fire zone will not  send a restore report until the zone actually restores     Chime Zone    A Chime zone is not a burglary zone  It can never sound the sirens or trigger the dialler  Its  purpose is to map it to a programmable output for an indication of sealed or unsealed state   Refer to Output Event Type   Global Chime on page 198     Chime zones require EOL resistors and they will register at a remote codepad  These zones do  not effect the operation of forced arming     Zone Not Used    If a zone is not used  program it as a zone type of 15  This zone will never sound the sirens or  trigger the dialler  An EOL resistor is not required if this zone type is used     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Zone Information    165    Zone Pulse Count    Zone pulse count is the number of times a zone must be triggered before the zone registers as  an alarm  The number of pulses vary between 0     15  The zone pulse count value is relative to  the time frame  i e  The number of pulses must be present during a particular time frame   Refer to    Table 74  Zone Pulse Count Times    on page 166 for time frame settings     Option Number Of Pulses        Option Number Of Pulses       Table 72  Number Of Pulses    Zones that have been programmed with pulse count which are continuously unsealed for  10 seconds will activate an alarm condition  24 Hou
243. ps will be heard after    entering this mode  These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call  forward sequence has been displayed     3  Enter  stay 1 2 1 followed by the you wish the control panel to divert all    calls to followed by  sv   and the button  Two beeps will be heard and the  system will return to the disarmed state     gc ASTER            3    sn  1   foo   N21  ESE   ED   ae       Example  If you wish to automatically divert all incoming calls to another telephone number  e g   9672  1777  when the system is armed in AWAY Mode  follow the example sequence below and  replace the telephone number mentioned in the manual with the telephone number that you  wish to divert all calls to     F 2580  3  mm   1           How To Disable The Telco Arming Sequence   If at any time you wish to cancel the telco arming sequence  you may enter your  MASTER CODE   followed by 3 and the button  followed by 1 and the button  then the  stay   button followed by the 4 and the button     r STERCODE   3   ww  1                ST    4                Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    100    ISSUE130            Solution 862 Installation Manual    How To Program The Telco Disarming Sequence     Easy Call Forward  Immediate Off     1     Enter your  MASTER cope  followed by    and the AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     Press button 2 followed by the  Away  button to change the t
244. put will reset when the day alarm zone has resealed  Day alarm may be    turned on and off by holding down the 4 button  Refer to Day Alarm Zones on  page 156 for programming zones to operate for day alarm     Day Alarm Latching  This output will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered     AWAY    The output will reset when the button has been pressed  Day alarm may be    turned on and off by holding down the 4 button  Refer to Day Alarm Zones on  page 156 for programming zones to operate for day alarm     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    194    ISSUE130    10    11    12    13    14    15    16    17    18    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Day Alarm Enabled   This output will operate as soon as day alarm has been enabled  The output will  reset when day alarm has been turned off  Refer to Day Alarm Zones on page 156  for programming zones to operate for day alarm     Day alarm can be turned on and off by holding down the 4 button  Three beeps  indicates that day alarm has been turned on  two beeps indicates that day alarm has  been turned off  Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 107 for further information  on day alarm     Telephone Line Fail   This output will operate when the in built telephone line fault module detects that  the telephone line has been disconnected for a period of approximately 40 seconds   The output will reset once the telephone line has been restored continuously for  more than 40 seconds  This
245. r Fire zones that have been  programmed with pulse count which are continuously unsealed for 30 seconds will  activate an alarm condition     Zone Pulse Count Handover  Zone pulse count handover will only operate with zone pulse count time options 8     15  Refer    to Zone Pulse Count Time on page 166 for more information     Any zone that registers one trigger pulse will automatically increment any other zone pulse  count which has already registered at least one trigger pulse during its respective time  To  enable this option  refer to Option 4 in    LOCATION 426    on page 217     24 Hour zones do not receive any handover pulses from other zones  24 Hour zones may  handover pulses to other zones     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    166 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Zone Pulse Count Time    Zone pulse count time is the time frame or period over which the programmed number of  pulses must register before an alarm condition is generated     20 ms Loop Response Time 150 ms Loop Response Time  Option Pulse Count Time Option Pulse Count Time    Ooo   0 5 Seconds  8   20 Seconds    1_  ISeod   9   30 Seconds  40 Seconds      4  seconds  Seconds           amp    to seconds       4              Table 74  Zone Pulse Count Times       For zone pulse count time  options 0     7 have a zone loop response time of 20 ms  For zone  pulse count time  options 8     15 have a zone loop response time of 150 ms  Loop response  time is the length of time a zon
246. r Format  to be  selected        Subscriber ID Zone Status System Status    Number PE ene           678   101200000      AA             Zone Normal   0  Alarm   1   Zone Bypassed   2  Zone Trouble   3    Disarmed   8  Armed   9    Normal   0  Panic   Duress   1       Fire Alarm   2  Medical Alarm   3          AC Normal   0  AC Failure   1    System Normal   0    System Fault   1        tt SOS             Figure 6  Basic Pager Display    The example in  Figure 6  Basic Pager Display  shows that the transmission has come from  Subscriber ID Number 678 and that Zone 2 is in alarm  Zone 3 has been manually isolated  the  system is armed  the panic zone is normal  the AC is connected and there is no fault condition     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    128    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Basic Pager Display Information    ISSUE130       Subscriber ID Number    This is the identification number of the control panel and is programmed in  LOCATION 034      039  on page 133 for Receiver 1 and  LOCATION 074     079  on page 136 for Receiver 2   The pocket pager will only display the last three digits of the Subscriber ID Number     Zone Status    The zone status display shows you the status of each zone  1   8  of the control panel  The  following table below describes what each number means when displayed on the zone status  display of the pocket pager     Number    Displayed Lone Description    Zone Normal  This indicates that the corresponding zone 
247. r a visual representation of  data transmissions between the control panel and the base station receiver  The dialling  sequence is also shown in this mode     The codepad will beep once every two seconds while telephone monitor mode active  regardless of whether the system is in Installer s Programming Mode or normal operating  mode  The first five indicators are used to display the progressive steps for a transmission to  the base station receiver     Zone Indicator Dialling Event    Telephone Line Seized    Dialling Phone Number                           4          Being Transmited              Table 30  Telephone Monitor Mode Indications    How To Turn Telephone Monitor Mode On   1  Enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by 6 and the  AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard    How To Turn Telephone Monitor Mode Off    1  Enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by    and the  AWAY  button   Two beeps will be heard      5                  6   A       Walk Test Mode    Walk test mode allows you to test detection devices to ensure that they are functioning  correctly  Before activating walk test mode  isolate any zones that are not required for testing   Refer to Isolating Zones on page 60 for further information     How To Enter Walk Test Mode    1  Enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by 7 and the  AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash  The  codepad will beep once every second while the system is in walk test mode     2  U
248. r repair     The transmit level from this device is set at a fixed level and because of this there may  be circumstances where the performance is less than optimal  Before reporting such  occurrences as faults  please check the line with a standard telepermitted telephone and  do not report a fault if the telephone performance is satisfactory     This device is equipped with pulse dialling while the Telecom standard is DTMF tone  dialling  There is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse  dialling     Use of dialling  when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment   may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition   Should such problems occur  the user should NOT contact the Telecom Faults Service     This equipment is set up to carry out test calls at pre determined times  Such test calls  will interrupt any other calls that may be set up on the line at the same time  The timing  set for such test calls should be discussed with the installer     The timing set for test calls from this equipment may be subject to drift  If this proves  to be inconvenient and your calls are interrupted  then the problem of timing should be  discussed with the equipment installer  The matter should NOT be reported as a fault to  Telecom Faults Service     This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111  Emergency Service     This equipment should not be used under any circumstances
249. rammer or remote codepad  go to  LOCATION 900     e g  900 followed by the   button     3  Hold down and continue to hold down the DEFAULT button   The default button will be located at the top of the PCB next to the PROGRAMMING  KEY connecting socket     4  Program a 15 into  LOCATION 900     e g   l5 followed by the   button      5  Release the default button     6  Enter command 9 6    followed by the   button to exit Installer s Programming  Mode  Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state     If you are using a remote codepad  the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish to  indicate that the system has returned to the disarmed state     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    42    ISSUE130       Solution 862 Installation Manual    Defaulfing The Control Panel    If the Solution 862 control panel does not have  LOCATION 900  programmed as 15   follow the procedure outlined below to successfully default the control panel back to the  factory default settings     How To Default The Control Panel Via Installer Code    1  Enter Installer Programming Mode      e g   1234 followed by the   button   Two beeps will be heard  The STAY  and AWAY indicators will begin to flash to indicate that you have accessed  programming mode     2  Enter Installer   s Programming Command 9 6 5 followed by the   button   Two beeps will be heard after the control panel has successfully been defaulted     3  Enter Installer s Programming Command 
250. raw With No Alarm and Codepad Fitted     Back Up Battery     Dimensions    Weight    Supplier Code    New Zealand Telepermit     Malaysia Approval Number     243    0     45 Degrees Celsius   1096   9596   TFO008 Plug Pack     240 Volt   18 Volt AC     1 3  Amp   65 mA   115 mA   105 mA    Ah  12 Volt DC Rechargeable Sealed Lead Acid  Battery    306 mm x 262 mm x 84 mm  Packed In Carton   2 5 Kg   N771   PTC 211 98 084    Pending    Software Version Number    LOCATION 999    1 00    When using the Hand Held Programmer  CC814   you have the ability to display the software    version number of the control panel     Refer to Command 999   Display Panel Type Or    Software Version Number on page 40 for more information     Advice To Users    The Austel permit that has been issued for this product is subject to the following conditions        The Solution 862 Control Panel may only be powered by an EDM TF008 Plug Pack     Approval Number Q92128      Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    ISSUE130    244    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    New Zealand Telepermit Notes    The grant of a telepermit for a device in no way indicates Telecom acceptance of  responsibility for the correct operation of that device under all operating conditions     This equipment shall not be used in any manner that could constitute a nuisance to other  Telecom customers     Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically damaged and  arrange for its disposal o
251. re Report       Table 76  Zone Options 2    Isolate In STAY Mode 1    If this option has been selected  it will allow the zone to be automatically isolated when the  system has been armed in STAY Mode 1     If this option is not selected  when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1  the zone will  activate an alarm when triggered as it normally would in AWAY Mode     Refer to Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode on page 205 if you wish to program a global  entry time for ALL zones except for 24 hour zone types when armed in STAY Mode 1  i e   The entry guard timer will override the delay time programmed for a delay zone   If the entry  guard timer has been programmed as  0  each zone will act as per its programmed zone type     Refer to Arming The System In STAY Mode 1 on page 54 for more information     Lone Isolation Allowed    If this option has been selected  it will allow the system operator to isolate the zone before  arming the system  If this option is not selected  the zone can not be manually isolated  When  a zone has been manually isolated  a zone bypass report  Contact ID Event Code 570  will be  sent  Refer to Isolating Zones on page 60 for more information     When isolating 24 hour zone types  the 24 hour zone will automatically send a zone bypass  report at the time the zone is selected to be isolated  All non 24 hour zone types will only send  a bypass report at the time the system is armed     If you require the system not to report zone bypass reports  progra
252. re actually operating  the status of both the AC mains and DC power to  the system and codepad generated alarms activated by the user     Zone Status     Bypass Reports    LOCATION 325   326 98    Location Description       Zone Bypass Report  Zone Bypass Restore Report    Table 80  Zone Status   Bypass Report Locations    A zone is bypassed when it is manually isolated  Refer to Isolating Zones on page 60 for  information on isolating zones  A  Zone Bypass  report  Contact ID Event Code 570  will be  transmitted at the end of exit time for any zone that has been manually isolated  24 hour zones  will send a    Zone Bypass  report at the time the zone has been selected to be isolated     A  Zone Bypass Restore  report will be transmitted when the system has been disarmed  All  bypassed zones are automatically cleared when the system has been disarmed     The bypass code parameter is used as the expansion digit in 4 2 Formats  It has no effect on  Contact ID Format as a zone bypass will always be reported on event code 570        If  Zone Bypass  reports               required  program  LOCATION 325   326  with    zero     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Reporting Information 177    Zone Status     Trouble Reports    LOCATION 327     328 23    Location Description       Zone Trouble Report  Zone Trouble Restore Report    Table 81  Zone Status   Trouble Report Locations    A zone is in trouble when it is unsealed at the end of exit time  A  S
253. re removing the programming key  may result in corrupting the programming key     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    36    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Command 964   Erase Programming Key    This command erases all data from the programming key  Only the Programming Key   CC891  may be used with the Solut ion 862 control panel     How To Erase The Programming Key    1     Enter Installer s Programming Mode  i e  1 2 3 4 followed by the   button     Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash on the  remote codepad to indicate that you have entered Installer   s Programming Mode  You  will also notice that the remote codepad will display the data currently programmed in     LOCATION 000        Connect the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the  control panel found at the top of the PCB  printed circuit board  next to the Auxiliary  Module socket     Enter command 9 6 4 followed by the   button   Two beeps will be heard after the programming keys data has been deleted     Before removing the programming key from the control panel  enter command    9 6 O followed by the   button to exit Installer s Programming Mode  The STAY  and AWAY indicators will now extinguish on the remote codepad and the system will  return to the disarmed state     Failing to exit Installer   s Programming Mode before removing the programming key  may result in corrupting the programming key     How To Eras
254. red Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program       Table 59  Telco Arm Disarm Dialling Digits    Telco Arming     Call Forward Immediate On  To turn Call Forward Immediate On     T2   Telephone number you want calls to go to       Example  If you wish to immediately forward all incoming calls to the telephone number 96721055 upon  arming the system in AWAY Mode  you would program the following     12196721055 00000000000000  0000    Telco Arming     Call Forward No Answer On  To turn Call Forward No Answer On       61  Phone number you want calls to go to     Example    If you wish to forward all incoming calls to the telephone number 96721055 upon arming the  system in AWAY Mode when there is no answer  you would program the following     116196721155 5 2  00000000000000  0000    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Dialler Information    139    Telco Disarming Sequence    LOCATION 143     158      xample      xample    0000000000000000    These locations allow you to automatically deactivate call diversion on your telephone when  you disarm the system from AWAY Mode     Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program    ee ERA UNE       Table 60  Telco Arm Disarm Dialling Digits    Telco Arming     Call Forward Immediate Off  To turn Call Forward Immediate Off     43215    If you wish to disable the Telco Arming     Call Forward Immediate upon disarming the system  from AWAY Mode  you would program the following      22102
255. red for each button of the transmitter     Arming In AWAY Mode    1  Press the BLACK button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds   Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the AWAY indicator will  illuminate  Exit time will now commence     If horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled  two beeps will be heard from the  horn speaker  If the strobe indications have been enabled  the strobe will flash for 6  seconds to indicate that the system has been armed     Disarming From AWAY Mode    1  Press either the BLACK or GREEN button on the hand held transmitter for two  seconds     Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the AWAY indicator will  extinguish     If the horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled  one beep will be heard from the  horn speaker  If the strobe indications have been enabled  the strobe will flash for 3  seconds to indicate that the system has been disarmed     Arming In STAY Mode 1    1  Press GREEN button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds   Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the STAY indicator will now  illuminate  Exit time will now commence     If the horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled  one two tone beep will be heard  from the horn speaker  If the strobe indications have been enabled  the strobe will flash  for 6 seconds to indicate that the system has been armed     Disarming From STAY Mode 1    1  Press either the BLACK or GREEN button on the hand held transmitter for two  
256. ription       Table 139  Zone Descriptions    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    250 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Location 323 Page 173  Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren  locaion324        Page 174  Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler     Location325   326                    Page 176  Zone Status   Bypass Reports Location 325 Zone Bypass Report          Location 326 Zone Bypass Restore Report 2  8     Location 327 328 EEE Page 177  Zone Status   Trouble Reports Location 327 Zone Trouble Report     Location 328 Zone Trouble Restore Report 2 3  Location 80 aad ye Gg ge Oe            Page 178  Zone Status   Sensor Watch Reports Location 329 Sensor Watch Report  p Location 330 Sensor Watch Restore Report 4 5                                   178  Zone Status   Alarm Restore Code  Location 38382 Re ee eee pe ee ee or DEM ae eg Page 178  Zone Status Reporting Options Ds io neport Required  1   Receiver 1  2   Receiver 2  4   Receiver 1   2  8   Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails  Location 333     334 Page 179  Open Close Reports Location 333 Opening Report          Location 334 Closing Report mm  Location 335                 179  4 i 0   No Report Required  Open Close Reporting Options     2   Receiver 2  4   Receiver 1   2    8   Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails                336                 180  Codepad Duress Report   lt             aie ge    E ae c QUEE Page 180  Codepad Panic Report     Location 3389 34000        Page 181  Codepad F
257. rm    Location 425  System Options 2    1   Codepad Panic To Be Silent   2   Codepad Fire To Be Silent   4   Codepad Medical To Be Silent  8   Access Denied To Be Silent    Location 426  System Options 3    1   AC Fail After 1 Hour  Disabled   After 2 Minutes   2   Ignore AC Fail   4   Pulse Count Handover Allowed   8   Handover Delay To Be Sequential    Location 427  System Options 4    1   Panel To Power Up In The Disarmed  If Power Reset    2   Arm Disarm Tracking On Power Up   4   Internal Crystal To Keep Time   8   Keyswitch Interface  Night Arm Station Or REOO5 Installed    Location 428  Consumer Options 1    1   Test Reports Only When Armed   2   Test Report After Siren Reset   4   Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1   8   STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status    Location 429  Consumer Options 2    1   Codepad Display Extinguish After 60 Seconds   2   Single Button Arming In Allowed  AWAY STAY Mode 1  amp  2   4   Single Button Disarming Allowed  STAY Mode 1  amp  2    8   Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm    Location 430  Consumer Options 3    1   Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps Allowed   2   Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9   4   Alarms Activate Siren  amp  Strobe Outputs In STAY Mode 1  amp  2  8   Reserved    Location 431    Radio Input Options    1   Radio Receiver  WE800    2   Latching Keyswitch Input   3   Momentary Keyswitch Input  4   Reserved    Location 748   749  Ring Burst Count    Increments Of 5 ms  Increments Of 80 ms    Location 748  Location 749    Lo
258. ronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Codepad Indicators    45    STAY Indicator    The STAY indicator is used to display that the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY  Mode 2  The STAY indicator will also flash in unison with the AWAY indicator when  Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions are used     Refer to page 54 for the different methods of arming the system in STAY Mode 1  Refer to  Zone Options 1 on page 167 for information on setting zones to be automatically isolated in  STAY Mode 1  For the method of arming the system in STAY Mode 2  refer to page 57   Refer to Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 85 when using the Installer Code or Setting  STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 101 when using the Master Code     Indicator Definition       90   System Is Armed In STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2    Off System Is Not Armed In STAY Mode  Flashing Zone Isolating Mode Or Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones    Table 10  STAY Indicator       MAINS Indicator    The MAINS indicator is used to display that the systems AC mains supply is normal or has  failed     When programming numbers  i e  Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions    the MAINS indicator will illuminate when you program numbers between 10 and 15  The  MAINS indicator represents digit 10 plus the value of the illuminated zone indicator  e g   If  you program a twelve  the MAINS indicator and zone 2 will illuminate      Indicator Definition    Flashing AC Mains Failure    Table 11  MAINS Indicator  
259. ry telephone number and secondary telephone number for Receiver 1  or Receiver 2 are only used for base station reporting and pager reporting  When either  Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 is set up for domestic reporting  both the primary telephone number  and the secondary telephone number will be ignored     The domestic dialling telephone numbers are located separately in    LOCATIONS 466     514     making provision to store up to 48 digits  The 48 locations are used to store any number of  telephone numbers and subject to the length of each telephone number  it is possible to store 4  or more different telephone numbers for domestic dialling     If both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 have been set up for domestic reporting format  you would  still have 48 data locations and both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 would use the same domestic  telephone numbers  The ability to program separate domestic telephone numbers for Receiver  1 and Receiver 2 is not available for domestic dialling format     Refer to Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting on page 121 for more information     Domestic Dialling Function    When the control panel has activated into alarm condition  it will commence dialling the first  telephone number programmed  If a busy or engaged tone has been detected  the control panel  will hang up and commence dialling the second telephone number  if one is programmed    However  the first call will be counted as one unsuccessful dialling attempt  If the second  telephone n
260. s  unsuccessful  Caution should be exercised when selecting the dialling method     Only use the Australian method if the control panel is to be connected to the Australian  Telecommunications Network  The International DTMF dialling option should only be used in  those countries that allow both the caller and the receiver to terminate the phone call  Using  the incorrect format will disable EDM s patent Telephone Anti Jamming feature     Option Dialling Format Option Dialling Format    1 Australian DTMF International DTMF   5 Digits Second   Touch Tone     Reversed Decadic  a Australian Decadic HE  10 Minus 1   Alternating DTMF Alternate DTMF   amp  Australian Decadic  amp  Reversed Decadic    Table 58  Dialling Formats       The alternating sequence is as follows  DTMF   Decadic   DTMF   Decadic   DTMF      Decadic    Reservea    LOCATION 081     112    00000000000000000000000000000000    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    138 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Teko Arming Sequence    LOCATION 113     142    000000000000000000000000000000    These locations allow you to automatically activate call diversion on your telephone when you  arm the system in AWAY Mode     Upon activating the Telco Arming Sequence when arming the system in AWAY Mode  the  control panel will redirect all calls to your mobile phone  pocket pager or answering service     Contact your telecommunications provider for more information on Call Forward operations     Digit Requi
261. s Report    LOCATION 336 6    Location Description    336 Codepad Duress Report    Table 86  Codepad Duress Report Location    A  Duress  report  Contact ID Event Code 121  will be transmitted to the base station receiver    when the    button is added to the end of any valid user code being used to disarm the system   This alarm will always be silent  A duress alarm can be triggered during exit time  i e  If the    system has been armed and then disarmed by adding the O button to the end of the user code    before exit time has expired  a  Duress  report will be transmitted   Adding    tothe end of a  user code when arming the system will not cause a duress alarm     Refer to Option 2 in    LOCATION 430    on page 221 if you wish to add the 3 button the end of  the user code being used to disarm the system in a duress situation       Restore reports are not transmitted for this event  If a  Duress  report is not required     program  LOCATION 336  with a zero     Codepad Panic Report    LOCATION 337   338 7    Location Description    Codepad Panic Reporting Code  Tens Digit        Codepad Panic Reporting Code  Units Digit     Table 87  Codepad Panic Report Locations    A  Panic Alarm  report  Contact ID Event Code 120  will be transmitted to the base station    receiver when either the two outside buttons 1 and    or  stay  and  AWAY  are pressed  simultaneously  This is an audible alarm  Refer to Option 1 in  LOCATION 425  on page  216 if you require codepad panic to be sil
262. seconds     Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the STAY indicator will  extinguish     If the horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled  one beep will be heard from the  horn speaker  If the strobe indications have been enabled  the strobe will flash for 3  seconds to indicate that the system has been disarmed     Panic Alarm    1  Press both the BLACK button and the GREEN button together for two seconds on the  hand held transmitter  This will initiate an audible panic alarm that will activate the  horn speaker  strobe and internal sirens     If Option 1     Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent has been programmed in    LOCATION  425    on page 216  the remote radio panic alarm will also be silent     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    72       Figure 5  4 Button    Hand Held Transmitter     RE013     ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    4 Channel Radio Remote Hand Held Transmitter Operations    All operations via the 4 channel radio remote hand held transmitter are fixed once the control  panel has been taught the hand held transmitters code  Therefore  there is no programming  required for each button of the transmitter  The DOOR and AUX buttons on the 4 channel  radio remote hand held transmitter may be used to operate programmable outputs  e g   garage  door or outside lights etc  on the control panel     Arming In AWAY Mode    1  Press the AWAY button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds   Two beeps will be 
263. smitters 304 Mhz  REO12 RE013   304 Mhz RF Receiver  WE800    2 Channel Radio Interface      005   EDMSAT   Satellite Siren  SS914   Programming Key  CC891    Alarm Link Software  CC816    CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad  CP508   CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad  CP508L   Night Arm Station  CP105    Phone Controller  CC91 1    Hand Held Dialler Tester  DD901   Cellular Diallers   PS100 Power Supply Module  PS100       008 Plug Pack  TF008    Solution Codepad Mimic Board  CC820   2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface  FA101     Radio Key Keyswitch Interface  CC813     224    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Optional Equipment    ISSUE130    EDM manufactures numerous accessories that can be used in conjunction with the Solut ion  862 control panel  These optional pieces of equipment will enhance certain features thus  making the system extremely flexible     2 Channel 4 Channel Hand Held Transmitters 304 Mhz  REO12 RE013     These hand held radio transmitters can be used in conjunction with the 304 Mhz RF Receiver   WE800  to remotely operate the system  Both hand held transmitters have the ability to  remotely arm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 and activate remote  panic alarms  The 4 channel hand held transmitter has the added ability to operate outputs such  as garage doors  swimming pool pumps or outside lights etc     304 Mhz RF Receiver  WE800    This interface was designed to allow the use of up to eight radio user codes  9     16   This is  useful if you require th
264. ss their needs too  while maintaining the simplicity of the manual and the product     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Introduction    Features    The Solution    Following is a list of the main features that the control panel will provide      gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt    gt     Eight Programmable User Codes  1     8   Eight Remote Radio User Codes  9     16   Six Programmable Burglary Zones   Two Programmable 24 Hour Zones   Dual Reporting   On Board Line Fault Module   Telco Arming Disarming Sequence  Automatic Arming   Automatic Disarming   Codepad Duress  Panic  Fire  Medical Alarms  STAY Mode and AWAY Mode Operation  Upload Download Programmable  Dynamic Battery Testing   Entry and Exit Warning Beeper   Remote Arming   Answering Machine Bypass   AC Fail and System Fault Indicators  Monitored Siren Output   Strobe Output   Relay Output   Separate Fire Alarm Sound   EDMSAT   Satellite Siren Compatible  Zone Lockout   Sensor Watch   Day Alarm   Event Memory Recall   Walk Test Mode   Delayed Reporting    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    17    862 security system uses the very latest in microprocessor technology to  provide you with more useful features and superior reliability and performance     ISSUE130    18    Quick Start    Solution 862 Installation Manual    The following steps will allow you to use
265. stem Armed In STAY Mode 1  Beep    Table 21  Horn Speaker Indication Beeps For Remote Operations       Strobe Duration System Status    3 Seconds System Disarmed       System Armed In AWAY Mode  System Armed In STAY Mode 1    Table 22  Strobe Indications For Remote Operations    Remote Radio User Code Priority Levels    The radio remote hand held transmitters may only be programmed to operate as user codes 9      16  Priority levels can be allocated to each radio remote hand held transmitter  allowing the  transmitter to only arm the system  arm and disarm the system etc  Refer to User Code Priority  on page 153 for more information     Before any hand held radio transmitter can operate the control panel  you will need to teach the    control panel the transmitters radio code  Refer to Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User  Codes on page 69 for more information     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Remote Radio Transmitter Operations 69    Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User Codes    Up to eight remote radio hand held transmitters  User Codes 9     16  may be used to operate the  system  Before the control panel will accept any of the signals from any radio remote hand  held transmitter  the control panel must learn the code of the transmitter     You may substituting the Master Code with the Installer Code if required to perform the  function of changing or deleting remote radio user codes     How To Add Or Change A Remote Radio User Code  1  Enter your
266. t    Location 364 Test Report Code  Tens Digit    Location 365 Test Report Code  Units Digit                    Location 366 Repeat Interval In Days  Location 367        Page 187  Test Reporting Dialler Options 0   No Report Required    1   Receiver 1  2   Receiver 2    4   Receiver 1   2    8   Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails              368 397 EE            Page 190  Output Location 368   373 Location 374   379 Location 380   385          omaa  ajojo jojo  ome  DPI  m  ITI p   Default For Default For Default For Strobe  Horn Speaker Fire Alarm Verification  Reset In    Hrs   Location 386     391 Location 392     397  Relay usi jo ojo          o fia  2 iron  Default For Default For Entry Exit  Sirens Running Warning   Day Alarm    O O sh         Event Type Polarity Time Base Time Multiplier    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    252    Location 398     399       Location 398  Entry Timer 1 Location 399    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Increments Of 1 Second  0   15 Sec   s   Increments Of 16 Seconds  0   240 Sec   s     Page 204    Location 400     401     gt  Location 400  Entry Timer 2 Location 401    Increments Of 1 Second  0   15 Sec   s   Increments Of 16 Seconds  0   240 Sec   s     Location 402     403    ru Location 402  Exit Time Location 403    Increments Of 1 Second  0   15 Sec   s   Increments Of 16 Seconds  0   240 Sec s     Location 404     405       Location 404  Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode oe AU    Increments Of 1 Sec
267. t the operator can advise the appropriate authorities to take  immediate action     This is a type of alarm raised by you to indicate to the monitoring station that there is an  emergency situation at your premises     Is a device used for arming your system via the telephone line  It is also used to acknowledge  domestic alarm reports     A radio user code that is used to arm and disarm the system remotely via hand held transmitters in  AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1  Remote panic alarms are also allowed     Refers to a zones status  If a zone is sealed  the detection devices are not violated and the zone  indicator will be extinguished  i e  a reed switch is closed or a detector is on stand by waiting for  an intrusion      Sensor watch gives the control panel the ability to recognise that detection devices may have  stopped working  This is a feature that monitors the operation of a zone over a programmed time  period     When programming your system  it is possible to have an individual zone for silent alarm  This    means that when the zone is violated your alarm system will communicate with the monitoring  station without sounding the sirens  This can only be programmed by your installer     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Terminals and Descriptions 233    Term Description    STAY Mode 1    STAY Mode 2    Telco Arming Sequence    Telco Disarm Sequence    Unsealed    User Code    Zones    24 Hour Zone    Is a condition that automatically isolates certain zo
268. te     gc                1   foo    sw l 6 1   PEN   Sax     ow     If you wish to automatically divert all unanswered incoming calls to another telephone number   e g   9672 1777  when the system is armed in AWAY Mode  follow the example sequence  below and replace the telephone number mentioned in the manual with the telephone number  that you wish to divert all calls to     a 2580  3  wv       a     How To Disable The Telco Arming Sequence   If at any time you wish to cancel the telco arming sequence  you may enter your  MASTER CODE   followed by 3 and the button  followed by 1 and the button  then the  stay   button followed by the 4 and the button             eeeecom   3   ww  1   ew      Sv    4    898        Example             Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    98    ISSUE130            Solution 862 Installation Manual    How To Program The Teko Disarming Sequence     Easy Call Forward  No Answer Off     1     Enter your  MASTER cope  followed by    and the AWAY  button   Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash     Press button 2 followed by the  Away  button to change the telco disarming sequence   Three beeps will be heard     If a previous telco disarming sequence has already been programmed  the sequence will  be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators  Refer to    Table 39   Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence    on page 96 for the  indicators and their 
269. te  codepad and the system will return to the disarmed state     Failing to exit Installer   s Programming Mode before removing the programming key  may result in corrupting the data in the programming key     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    32    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    How To Test The Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer    1     Before connecting the hand held programmer onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING  KEY  make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position  and that no external key has been plugged onto the hand held programmer     Enter the Installer s Programming Mode  i e  1 2 3 4 followed by the   button    Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the data currently  programmed in    LOCATION 000        Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held  programmer     Enter command 9 5    followed by the   button    Two beeps will be heard after the programming key has successfully been tested  If you  heard a long beep after issuing this command  the programming key has become corrupt  and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt data  Refer to Command 964   Erase  Programming Key on page 36 for more information     Before removing the programming key from the hand held programmer  enter command    9 6 O followed by the   button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode  Two  beeps will be heard and the system will now return
270. te as a keyswitch zone  Keyswitch zones  will report as user code 16     Option   Description                Amand Disarm In AWAY Mode   4       Arm and          STAY Mode      e            Disarm From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode   s   Momentary Armand Disarm in AWAY Mods   9  Momentary Armin AWAY Mode       Table 75  Keyswitch Zone Options    Latching Arm and Disarm In AWAY Mode    If this option has been selected  the system will either arm or disarm from AWAY Mode when  using the latching keyswitch input     Latching Arm In AWAY Mode    If this option has been selected  the system will arm in AWAY Mode when using the latching  keyswitch input  Disarming the system will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this  option has been selected     Latching Disarm From AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2    If this option has been selected  the system will disarm from AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 or  STAY Mode 2 when using the latching keyswitch input  Arming the system will not be  permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected     Latching Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1    If this option has been selected  the system will arm or disarm in STAY Mode 1 when using  the latching keyswitch input  Arming and disarming the system in AWAY Mode will not be  permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected     Latching Arm In STAY Mode 1    If this option has been selected  the system will arm in STAY Mode 1 when using the latching  keyswitch input  Arming
271. ted  If this is the case  you must ensure  that all zones are sealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Operations            53    Disarming The System From AWAY Mode    When you enter the premises after the system has been armed in AWAY Mode  you will need  to disarm the system from AWAY Mode to disable detection devices that will activate the  sirens  strobe and bell outputs     If there has been an alarm condition prior to disarming the system from AWAY Mode  a  flashing ZONE indicator will be displayed  indicating a previous alarm on that zone     How To Disarm The System From AWAY Mode  1  Enter your  Cove  followed by the  AWAY  button     Two beeps will be heard and the AWAY indicator will extinguish     CODE    AWAY           Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    54    ISSUE130          Method One    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Arming The System In STAY Mode 1    Arming the system in STAY Mode   is only used when the perimeter and unused areas of the  premises need to be armed to detect any would be intruder from entering the premises  at the  same time allowing you to move freely within an area which has been automatically isolated     Programming zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 can only be programmed by  the installer  Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 171 for further information on setting zones to  be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 
272. tem Status     Low Battery Restore Report  Units Digit     Table 96  System Status     Low Battery Restore Report Locations    A  Low Battery  restore report will be transmitted if the back up battery has been restored the  next time the system has been armed  or when the next dynamic battery test reports the battery  test is OK     If a  Low Battery Restore  report is not required  program  LOCATION 354   355  with a  zero     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Reporting Information 185    System Status   Access Deniea  LOCATION 356   358 6 7    Location Description    Code Retries  0 15     System Status     Access Denied Reporting Code  Units Digit        System Status     Access Denied Reporting Code  Tens Digit     Table 97  System Status     Access Denied Locations    An  Access Denied  report  Contact ID Event Code 421  will be transmitted to the base station  receiver when the number of incorrect code attempts equals the number programmed in   LOCATION 356   This is an audible alarm  Refer to Option 8 in  LOCATION 425  on page  216 if you require this alarm to be silent     a  Restore signals for this event are not transmitted  If an  Access Denied  report is not  required  program  LOCATION 357   358  with a zero     Code Retries    Code retries restricts the amount of times an invalid user code can be used in an attempt to  operate the system  This location sets the number of incorrect code attempts that will cause an  alarm conditio
273. the programming key  locate the socket marked PROGRAMMING KEY found at  the top of the PCB  printed circuit board  next to the Auxiliary Module socket  Observe the  triangular markings on the printed circuit board and line them up with the markings on the  programming key     To copy the control panel s data into the programming key  access Installer   s Programming  Mode  e g  1224 followed by the   button  and enter Installer   s Programming    Command    6 2 followed by the   button  Refer to Command 962   Copy Control Panel  Memory To Programming Key on page 34 for further information     To exit the Installer s Programming Mode  enter command 9 60 followed by the    button  Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state  Before  removing the programming key  wait two seconds for the activity LED to return to its normal  state  The programming key will now become your standard data pattern for future  programming of your control panels     It should be noted that when entering the Installer s Programming Mode  inserting a  programming key and then changing any location will cause a simultaneous update of not only  the programming keys data  but also the control panels data  Therefore  you are not able to  change data in the programming key without the same location being changed in the control  panels memory     Connecting a Programming Key  CC891  to the control panel when the programming  keys memory is blank will corrupt the control panel s me
274. to have  Anti Jamming and believe it or not  they push this feature as if it were a major break through in  control panel technology  Well this in fact is not the case at all as most control panels have  some sort of Anti Jamming feature  We can go as far back as the early 1980 s where even the  678 diallers incorporated a form of Anti Jamming as a standard programmable option     The important thing to note is that as most American designed products are primarily aimed at  their local market and telephone networks  when they are imported to Australia their anti   jamming function does not perform as it should     To clear up just what anti jamming is and how it works needs some understanding of  Telephone Networks  In America either of the two parties  i e  the one who initiated the call or  the one receiving the call  can clear the line by placing the hand piece back on the hook  If you  pick up the hand piece again  dial tone will be received and you will be able to make a new call  immediately  This is not so here in Australia     In Australia  only the calling party can immediately terminate the call  If you receive a call  from someone and hang up on them  picking the hand piece back up again to make a new call  only reconnects you to the original caller  It will not be possible to make another call until the  original caller hangs up or you hang up phone for ninety seconds or longer  So you see  Australia is very different and needs a special form of anti jamming to su
275. ts will activate the output     If the output has been triggered by either Entry Timer 1  Entry Timer 2  or Entry  Guard Timer For STAY Mode  the output will reset once the entry timer has expired  or the system has been disarmed     If a zone programmed for day alarm has triggered during the disarmed state  the  output will reset when the zone has resealed  Day alarm may be turned on and off    by holding down the 4 button  Refer to Day Alarm Zones on page 156 for  programming zones to operate for day alarm     Exit Warning   Entry Warning   Day Alarm Resetting  This output combines exit warning  entry warning and day alarm so that any of these  three events will activate the output     This output will activate once the system has been armed in AWAY Mode  STAY  Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 irrespective of any zones being sealed or unsealed until  exit time expires     The next time the output will activate will be during entry time and will reset once  entry time has expired or the system has been disarmed  This output will also  operate when the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode is timing     If a zone programmed for day alarm has triggered during the disarmed state  the  output will reset when the zone has resealed  Day alarm may be turned on and off    by holding down the    button  Refer to Day Alarm Zones on page 156 for  programming zones to operate for day alarm     Day Alarm Resetting  This output will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered   The out
276. tted  The  EDMSAT requires only two wires for operation on which the charging of the battery and  triggering of the siren and strobe are carried out  This is done by pulse code modulating   PCM  the charging voltage  Any attempt to tamper with the wiring or to substitute an  alternative power source across the wiring will disrupt the data transmission and the EDMSAT  will activate immediately  When the EDMSAT carries out a battery test  the unit will sound  for two seconds if the battery test fails  Refer to the Output Event Type     EDMSAT   Satellite  Siren on page 192 when programming a programmable output for the satellite siren     Hand Held Programmer  CC814     The hand held programmer is used to program the locations in the Solut ion 862 control  panel  The unit displays the actual location number and the data value currently programmed   It comes complete with a one metre connecting cable and a socket for an external programming  key  Refer to Programming With The Hand Held Programmer on page 25 for more  information     Programming Key  CC891     The programming key is a unique device that will store all programming information  programmed in your control panel once copied to the programming key  The programming  key can hold all your common configuration data such as monitoring station telephone  numbers and zone reporting channels etc     Alarm Link Software  CC816     This software package is designed to be used for programming the Solut ion 862 control  panel by
277. ttery Report                      eee 184  Low Battery Restore                                                  184  Reporting                                               186  System TIME                                     210      Telco Arming                                                    80  96  138  Telco Disarming Sequence                          sss 139  Telecom Connection                                                     236  Telephone          7                                             238  Telephone Arming                    see 112  145  Telephone Line Fault                          sse 64  Telephone Line Fault Options                                 s 141  Telephone Monitor Mode                          sse 87    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Index    Telephone Numbers    Changing Domestic Phone Numbers                          78  Terminal Definitions and Descriptions                         230  Test Repotts         esee emet retis 110   After Siren Reset    oeste 219   Dialler Options    nome Deme 187   Only When Armed                      esee 219  239   Repeat Interval                      eee 187   Reporting Time                  seeeeeeneee 187   Set First Test Report    TI  TFO008 Plug Pack    226  Transmission Format For Receiver 1                            133  Transmission Format For Receiver 2                           136  Trouble Reports  ennen ien ianen a an 177  U  Unsealed       ette e rfe 233  User  Codes  coe n
278. umber is also busy or an engaged tone is detected  the control panel will hang up  and commence dialling the third telephone number  if one is programmed  or return to the first  telephone number     If a busy tone is not detected  the control panel will assume that the telephone has been  answered and will begin sending its transmission  The transmission sequence consists of an  identification beep  followed by a siren tone and a long pause  The transmission sequence will  repeat itself until the control panel receives an acknowledgment tone during the pause or the  control panel automatically hangs up after a period of two minutes  The identification beep  will allow the customer to verify which control panel made the call if more than one control  panel is reporting to the same telephone number  The identification beep is programmed in   LOCATION 039  of the Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1 or    LOCATION 079    of the  Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2     A maximum of six calls per alarm event will be made when the control panel has been set  up for  Domestic Dialling Format   This count includes any unsuccessful calls  The  counter will be reset if the zone re triggers and a further six attempts will be made  The  control panel will stop dialling after six attempts or three successful calls  The control  panel will also stop dialling if a valid user code has been entered at the remote codepad     If both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 have been programmed for domestic d
279. unt Handover    8 Handover Delay      Be Sequential      Table 127  System Options 3    AC Fail After 1 Hour  Disabled   After 2 Minutes     If this option has been selected  the MAINS indicator will begin to flash as soon as the AC  mains supply becomes disconnected  An  AC Loss  signal  Contact ID Event Code 301  will  be transmitted to the base station receiver after the AC mains supply has been disconnected  continuously for more than 60 minutes        If this option has not been selected  the MAINS indicator will begin to flash and an  AC Loss   signal  Contact ID Event Code 301  will be transmitted to the base station receiver after the  AC mains power has been disconnected continuously for 2 minutes     The MAINS indicator will cease to flash once the AC mains supply has been restored for more  than two minutes     An    AC Loss Restore    report will be transmitted to the base station receiver after the AC  mains supply has been restored continuously for more than 2 minutes irrespective of this  option being set     Ignore AC Fail    If this option has been selected  the MAINS indicator will not flash  nor will the codepad beep  once every minute when the AC mains has been disconnected from the control panel  If you  require a programmable output to operate when the AC mains has failed  refer to Output Event  Type     AC Fail on page 194     If this option has been selected  an    AC Loss  report  Contact ID Event Code 301  will still  report to the base station recei
280. ur Fire Zone 164  Chime Zone 164  Zone Not Used 164   Zone Pulse Count 165  Zone Pulse Count Handover 165   Zone Pulse Count Time 166   Zone Options 1 167  Lockout Siren  amp  Lockout Dialler 167  Delay Alarm Reporting 167  Silent Alarm 168  Sensor Watch 168   Keyswitch Zone Options 169  Latching Arm and Disarm In AWAY Mode 169  Latching Arm In AWAY Mode 169  Latching Disarm From AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 169  Latching Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1 169  Latching Arm In STAY Mode 1 169  Latching Disarm From STAY Mode   Or STAY Mode 2 169  Momentary Arm and Disarm In AWAY Mode 170  Momentary Arm In AWAY Mode 170  Momentary Disarm From AWAY Mode  STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 170  Momentary Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1 170  Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 1 170  Momentary Disarm From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 170   Zone Options 2 171  Isolate In STAY Mode 1 171  Zone Isolation Allowed 171  Forced Arming Allowed 171  Zone Restore Report 171   Zone Reporting Information 172  Zone Report Code 172  Zone Dialler Options 172   Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren 173          Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler 174       System Reporting Information 175                                                                                                                                                                         Reporting Information 176  Zone Status     Bypass Reports 176  Zone Status     Trouble Reports 177  Zone Status     Sensor Watch Reports 178  Zone Status     Alarm Rest
281. uring the same siren run time will reset when the sirens reset  This prevents an  intruder from triggering all zones then waiting for the sirens to stop before re entering the  premises     All zones are programmed for both lockout siren and dialler  Zone 1 is triggered followed by  all other zones causing the sirens to sound and the dialler to report to the base station receiver   Zone 1 will be the only zone that stops reporting to the base station receiver because of the first  zone to trigger is locked out  The remaining zones will continue to report if they are triggered  again     Refer to Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren on page 173 to set the number of times the siren  will be allowed to activate before it will be locked out and Swinger Shutdown Count For  Dialler on page 174 to set the number of times the dialler will activate before lockout will take  effect     Delay Alarm Reporting    This option will allow the reporting of alarms on selected zones to be delayed to allow the user  to enter their code to cancel alarms that are not required to report  All sounding devices  e g    horn speaker  strobe and bell outputs  will operate as soon as the alarm condition occurs  but  the dialler will not operate until the delay time in  LOCATION 406     407  on page 205 has  expired     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    168    ISSUE130    Example    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Silent Alarm    A zone programmed to be silent will not trigger t
282. urned on or  off  When day alarm has been turned on  the STAY indicator will flash once every three  seconds  Refer to Option 8 in    LOCATION 428    on page 219 for more information   Monitoring of zones 5     8 can be achieved by programming an output to mimic a zone  Refer    to Output Event Types on page 192 for more information on all available output types that can  be programmed     How To Turn Day Alarm On    1  Hold down the 4 button until three beeps are heard     How To Turn Day Alarm Off    1  Hold Down the 4 button until two beeps are heard     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    158 Solution 862 Installation Manual    FOL Resistor Valve  LOCATION 266    Resistor Value i Resistor Value    6K8  Blue  Grey  Black  Brown  1   10K  Brown  Black  Orange     No EOL Resistor    1K  Brown  Black  Red     Split EOL  3K3 6K8  1  Resistors Required  Six Burglary Zones  amp  Two 24 Hour Zones    1K5  Brown  Green  Red    2K2  Red  Red  Red        3K3  Orange  Orange  Black  Brown  1   3K9  Orange  White  Red     4K7  Yellow  Violet  Red     5K6  Green  Blue  Red     10  11  12  13  14   5    1       Table 70  EOL Resistor Value    The control panel has the ability to be programmed for different values of EOL  End Of Line   resistors  This is a global parameter and will effect all four zones simultaneously  It gives the  ability to fit the Solution 862 control panel into an existing installation without having to  change the EOL resistors  This featur
283. urred  but will not cause the codepad to beep once every minute until the fault  has been acknowledged or rectified     Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9    2 This option if selected  will allow the customer to use the digit    after entering their code to  disarm the system to activate a duress alarm     Alarms Activate Sirens  amp  Strobe Ouputs In STAY Mode 1  amp  2    4 This option will need to be selected if audible alarms are required when the system has been  armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2     Reserved    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    222 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Radio Input Options    LOCATION 431 0    Description    Radio Receiver  WE800     Latching Keyswitch Input  Momentary Keyswitch Input       Table 132  Radio Input Options    Radio Receiver  WE800       This option needs to be selected when using the optional 304 Mhz RF Receiver  WE800  for  remote operations using radio remote hand held transmitters     Latching Keyswitch Input    2 This option allows you to connect a latching keyswitch to the JP3 terminals D and GND to  remotely arm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode     Momentary Keyswitch Input    4 This option allows you to connect a momentary keyswitch to the JP3 terminals D and GND to  remotely arm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Optional Equipment    This section includes the following     2 Channel 4 Channel Hand Held Tran
284. ver unless disabled in    LOCATION 348   349  on page 183     Lone Pulse Count Handover    If this option has been selected  any zone pulse count readings will handover and accumulate to  any zone that is triggered during the same arming cycle  Zone pulse count handover will only  operate with zone pulse count options 8 15  Refer to Zone Pulse Count on page 165 and Zone  Pulse Count Time on page 166 for more information     24 hour zones do not receive any handover pulses from other zones  24 hour zones can  handover pulses to other zones     Handover Delay To Be Sequential    If this option has been selected  handover delay will be sequential  i e  In numerical order from  lowest to highest   If the sequence is broken before the entry time expires  an alarm will occur   If this option has not been selected  handover delay will follow the entry path provided that a  delay zone has been triggered first  Refer to Handover Zone on page 162 for more  information     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    218    Solution 862 Installation Manual    System Options 4    LOCATION 427    ISSUE130    Example    0    Option Description    Panel To Power Up Disarmed  If Power Reset     Internal Crystal To Keep Time  Keyswitch Interface  Night Arm Station Or RE005 Installed    Table 128  System Options 4    Arm Disarm Tracking On Power Up       Panel To Power Up Disarmed    If this option has been selected  the control panel will power up in the disarmed state once th
285. via the hand held programmer  the hand held programmer will  display the software version number of the control panel     How To Display The Control Panel Type Or Software Version Number    1  Enter Installer s Programming Mode  i e  1 2 3 4 followed by the   button    Two beeps will be heard and the data currently programmed in    LOCATION 000    will  be displayed via the hand held programmer or remote codepad     If you are using the remote codepad  the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash  to indicate that you have entered Installer   s Programming Mode     2  Enter command 9 9 9 followed by the   button   Two beeps will be heard     If you are using the hand held programmer  the right display will indicate the software  version number of the control panel     If you are using the remote codepad  the codepad will display a zone indicator    corresponding to the control panel type  Refer to  Table 7  Control Panel Type  above  for more information     3  Press the   button to exit this command and return to the Installer   s Programming  Mode     4  Enter command 9 6 O followed by the   button to exit Installer s Programming  Mode  Two beeps will be heard and the system will now return to the disarmed state     If you are using the remote codepad  the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish to  indicate that you have returned to the disarmed state     Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Programming 41    Disable Factory Defaul    LOCATION 900 0    
286. will be 1     If zone 2 triggers an alarm  the swinger shutdown count will be decremented by one to a  swinger shutdown count of zero  therefore  locking out zone 2 from activating the dialler again  until the system has been reset  However  at this point in time  the swinger shutdown count for  the dialler has again a lockout count of 6 and the process of swinger shutdown for the  remaining zones including zone 1 begin again until all zones have been locked out     ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Reporting Information    This section includes the following     Zone Status     Bypass Reports   Zone Status     Trouble Reports   Zone Status     Sensor Watch Reports  Zone Status     Alarm Restore Code  Zone Status Reporting Options  Open Close Reports   Open Close Reporting Options  Codepad Duress Report   Codepad Panic Report   Codepad Fire Report   Codepad Medical Report   Codepad Reporting Options   System Status     AC Fail Report   System Status     AC Fail Restore Report  System Status   Low Battery Report  System Status   Low Battery Restore Report  System Status   Access Denied   System Status Reporting Options   Test Reporting Time    Test Reporting Dialler Options    176 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Reporting Information    This section covers features that are involved with the basic house keeping of the system  This  includes monitoring of the zones   whether they are isolated from the system or more  importantly that they a
287. wledged    Table 13  Audible Indications       ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    Codepad Indicators 47      5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad  Solucion The codepad is the communications interface between you and your alarm    12345    system  The codepad allows you to issue commands and offers both visual  678 and audible indications that guide you through the general operation     The codepad incorporates numerous indicators  There are ZONE indicators       that are used to show the condition of each zone and seven others for general  f       y status  The following is a list of situations and the relevant indications that       will be seen     Figure 2  CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad         5081      123             Zone Indicators    The ZONE indicators are used to display the status of the zones  The following table lists the  various circumstances that the indicators will display  i e  Zone Sealed  Zone Unsealed      Indicator Definition     0 25 enr os Off  Zone Is In Alarm Condition  Flashing Slow   1 Sec On   1 Sec Off  Zone Is Manually Isolated    Table 14  Zone Indicators       AWAY Indicator    The AWAY indicator is used to display that the system is armed in AWAY Mode  The  indicator will also illuminate when the system is armed in AWAY Mode  The AWAY indicator  will also flash in unison with the STAY indicator when Installer s Programming Mode or  Master Code Functions are used     Refer to page 52 for more information on the different methods on 
288. y       32   4    9   J rowdBy2     6   6   Break _    Fottowe By 4         Table 26  Domestic Dialling Digits    ISSUE130 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited    System Functions 79    Example  If you wish to program two separate telephone numbers  9672 1777 and 9672 1233   follow  the sequence below and replace the telephone numbers mentioned in the manual with the  telephone numbers that you wish to program     EF 1234  2          96721777         4    96721233       How To Disable Domestic Dialling    If at any time you wish to cancel domestic dialling for any reason  e g   You are moving house  and do not wish the system to continue calling your work place or mobile phone etc   you may    enter your  INSTALLER CODE  followed by 2 and the  AWAY button  the LS7 Y  button followed             Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 MAINS  Digit Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator       Table 27  Codepad Indicators When Changing Telephone Numbers    Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    80 Solution 862 Installation Manual    Change Telco Arm Disarm Sequence    3 This installer code function allows you to program the call forward sequence to automatically  operate when you arm the system in AWAY Mode  This feature is only available if your  telecommunication provider has the call forward option available     When arming the system in AWAY Mode  the control panel will autom
289. y for more  than 2 minutes  the control panel will send an    AC Loss    signal  Contact ID Event Code 301   to the base station receiver and the codepad will commence beeping once every minute until    the AC mains supply has been reconnected or acknowledged by pressing the button     When the AC mains supply has been restored  the MAINS indicator will automatically stop  flashing and return to its normal state  Once the AC mains supply has been connected  continuously for two minutes  the control panel will send an         Loss    restore report and the  codepad will automatically stop it   s once a minute beep     How To Determine The Type Of System Fault    To determine all system faults other than the AC mains supply  enter fault analysis mode by  following the procedures below     1  Hold down the 5 button until two beeps are heard   The FAULT indicator will remain steady and the STAY and AWAY indicators will flash  in unison with each other     The illuminated ZONE indicators will indicate the type of system fault that has  occurred  Refer to  Table 20  Fault Indicators  below for the list of different system  faults that may occur     2  To exit fault analysis mode  press the  Away  button  The STAY and AWAY indicators  will extinguish and the FAULT indicator will remain illuminated     Zone Indicator Fault Description     4   Hom SpenterDiscomaend                                         s                                       Table 20  Fault Indicators    How To Ackn
290. ystem has next been disarmed          STAY      STAY     ZONE NUMBER     STAY     Away                   As each zone is selected to be isolated  the corresponding ZONE indicator will begin  B to flash  If a mistake is made  press the zone number that was incorrectly entered    followed by the button  This zone is now no longer selected to be isolated and  the ZONE indicator will extinguish       xample    If you wish to manually isolate zones 1  3 and 4  the following sequence would be entered  below     sco  Sw   J  1   3 e   4   STAY    AWAY                 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE130    62    ISSUE130    Solution 862 Installation Manual    Code To Isolate    The method of code to isolate restricts only those user codes that have the priority level Code  To Isolate set to be able to isolate zones  Therefore  if any user code has this priority level set   the method of standard isolating will be disabled     1     Press the LSIAYJ button     Enter your  Cone   Press the button     Three beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will begin to flash  If you attempt to  enter isolating mode with a user code that has not been allocated for code to isolate  the  system will ignore the attempt to enter the mode       Enter the  ZONE NUMBER required to be isolated followed by the  STAY   button  The    zone you have just selected to be isolated will now begin to flash     24 hour zones will automatically isolate as soon as the button has been pressed
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
GUIDA INTRODUTTIVA FRENIC-Eco . FRN-F1  SérieuSement amuSant ! tout l`eSprit du CaSino barrière de blotzheim    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file